Episode 188: How To Self Publish Your Book To Grow Your Business – with Alexa Bigwarfe and April Beach

Alexa Bigwarfe SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Entrepreneur & Business Community App

Who This Episode is Great For:

Small business owners who want to write a book but need to know the steps, how to approach the process, and the ins and outs of self-publishing. If you’re considering self-publishing a book but you don’t know where to start, you’ll leave this episode with clarity and simple steps to take action. 

Summary:

Learn the difference between self and traditional publishing, what your options are to sell a self-published book, the benefits of self-publishing, well-known influencers who’ve chosen to self publish, as well and the 4 steps to start self-publishing your book! If you have a book in you but you aren’t sure where to start when it comes to self-publishing, this is the podcast episode to binge with guest expert Alexa Bigwarf, founder of Write|Publish|Sell and Women In Publishing Summit. 

Highlights:

  1. Know the 4 steps to self-publishing your book
  2. Understand the differences between self and traditional publishing
  3. Get insider secrets about creating your own self-publishing imprint
  4. Understand the connection between brand consistency in your book and business design

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi there, and welcome to the sweet life. When you were in business podcast, this is episode number 188 in everything we’re talking about on today’s show can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 88,
because we’re giving you a ton of resources. Like we usually love to do here on this podcast. If you, and I don’t know each other yet, my name’s April beach. I help entrepreneurs grow and scale their business online and develop their internationally leading suite of signature offers. One of the things that you get here on the show, our business strategies you can take to the bank.
So every one of our experts is vetted and I myself have been coaching entrepreneurs to grow and scale their business for over 24 years, we are so glad that you are here. And today on the show, I’m really passionate about this topic and our guests. I’ve become a really good friend with already in a quick period of time, virtually. And I’m super excited to introduce you to her.
Now, let me give you a little bit of background story. You might not know this, but one of the ways that I grew one of my first companies was by self publishing a book, and it was really powerful. You guys, as a matter of fact, this book sold copies everywhere and still to this day, that company, the secondary business consulting firm that I own it’s called baby planner,
inc leads the industry in business consulting for companies that market to new unexpecting families. And the reason why I still have that reach and notoriety in that space is because they started out by self publishing a book on my expertise in that niche, niche, whatever you want to call it, right? But here is the deal. Here’s the truth. I made a ton of mistakes and some of the mistakes that I made ended up costing me a lot of money and ended up costing me a lot of time.
And if I knew more about what I was doing, instead of just doing it and winging it, then I think that my results could have been a lot better or at least a lot less painful. And so today on the show, Alexa, big Wharf is here and she’s going to walk you through the power of self publishing a book you’re going to be blown away when you hear some of the most well known influencers that we all like love and follow and really admire in that they have chosen to go.
The self publishing route. Alexa is a USA today, bestselling author speaker, and publishing partner. She coaches others and offers publishing solutions to those who want to grow their business and share their story through writing a book. She’s the founder of write, publish, sell Kat biggie, press purple butterfly, press Chrysalis, press, and the women in publishing summit,
which I’m so excited to be able to speak at her summit coming up here in spring of 2021. And so let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. You are going to know the quick start steps to publish your book. The difference between self publishing versus going through a traditional publisher and actually getting a literary agent. So we’re hashing out all of this for you today on the show.
And you’re also going to know how and why you can use a book to increase your known well known expertise in your space. So a lot of great things coming your way. This is a great show for those of you guys who are new in business, and you’re just trying to start your platform. And it’s especially an incredibly good episode for you to listen to.
If you have been in business, you have a platform, but you’re what we call like the best known secret. We need to get your voice and your expertise established even more in your space. So let’s go ahead and dive in all of the show notes again, can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 88. And if you haven’t yet be sure to join our new online community business networking app.
It’s totally private. If you haven’t heard we’ve ditched Facebook groups, we’re super excited about it. You can join us by visiting Sweetlife community.com, where you’re going to get all your podcast insights and bonuses in there. All right, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.<inaudible> All right. You guys welcome back to another sweet life entrepreneur business and podcast episode.
And I’m here with my new friend, Alexa, big war, and we met on Instagram. I was really happy. You know, I’ll be really honest. I don’t meet a lot of people on Instagram, but I totally just want to hang out with and have coffee all the time. But Alexa was one of them. And since then we’ve had a chance to connect deeper and I’ve learned more about what she does and frankly,
you guys really need to know what she does. So Alexa, just introduce yourself here. Welcome to the sweet life podcast. I’m so glad that you have given us a chance to hear all about your expertise. Well, thank you so much for having me and I feel the same way. I mean, I found you, we started connecting whatever, and then of course I do what I always do.
I obsessively like Googled everything, started listening to your podcast and was like, Oh my gosh, she’s saying all the things I need to hear right now. So that’s fantastic. I’m a writer, an author, an author coach, a publisher and a mom, which is a very important part of my story because I didn’t set down this path. I never thought about running my own business or ever even being an entrepreneur.
And sometimes, literally life gives you lemon and you can choose to make lemonade or you can choose to fall to pieces. And without going into all the background, in a nutshell, we lost an infant daughter. She was one of a set of identical Twins and she passed away at two days old. And that took me to blogging. I mean, as you can imagine,
going through anything like that, like I just started, I had, I’m a passive aggressive person and I didn’t necessarily want to share all my feelings face to face with people, but I had a lot of feelings that I wanted to be sharing. So I started blogging and writing about grief and loss and writing about twin to twin transfusion syndrome, which is what they had writing about life in the NICU,
because her twin was a one pound 10 ounce, one who spent a long time in the NICU. So lots of content for blogging and eventually decided I wanted to write a book for grieving mothers. So that’s how my publishing journey started. I figured it all out on myself. I did the things I needed to do fell in love with the process, started writing about parenting.
And I go authored a book called lose the Cape realities for busy, modern moms and strategies to survive. We should’ve gone with a shorter subtitle, but it was at that point really about the second book where people were like, what are you doing? How are you doing this? I want to write a book, tell me what to do. And so a business again,
I love that story. I’m sorry that it started out with so much pain and heartbreak. And I mean, you’re right though. I mean, those are some of the things that we just are so compelled to do. I think some of the best, most powerful companies are started with a deep rooted emotional story like that. And I agree now, writing is such a healing tool.
It can really be an excellent tool for helping people come through trauma, come through grief, come through just anything they’re going through. So that’s actually another Avenue that we really do is work with people on writing to heal because it was such a massive part of my process. Yeah. So give everybody kind of an overview on your company. So write, publish,
sell, and you have the women in publishing summit. So let’s go ahead and lay the foundation and then we’ll dive into what you’re going to train us on today. Great. So I started write, publish, sell as an opportunity to charge people for all the questions they were asking. Right. I started doing the things that were really hard for people to figure out,
like lay out an ebook conversion and how to find all the things that you need to write a book and all of that stuff. And through the process, I created a publishing imprint and created a publishing house. And then another one, and then another one, that’s a whole different story. But you know, I wanted to be a bigger part of the process than just helping someone lay out their book and help them load it to Amazon.
But actually what I found was that where I really enjoy working is not in the, I mean the publishing side. I’m glad I have that experience, but I liken the whole process of helping people figure out what the book is that they should write and why. And then kind of project managing it is really the best thing to get it through from there to publish.
And we work with authors who are self published, who are traditionally published and who are hybrid published as well, which is kind of a cross between the two. I love this process of helping people find the resources and figure out what to do and how to do it. And that’s how the women and publishing some, it was born because I really much like pod-casters,
I think we love showcasing resources and tools and people and putting them in front of the audience of people who need them. So we took that route to create this big basically like week of encouragement and support and educational resources and really a shout out to the women who are writing books, selling books, editing books, creating covers and layouts for books, the whole gamut,
because we just don’t get enough credit out there. It’s so exciting. That’s so exciting. That’s what, so we can just lay it out there, even though it’s going to be months after this particular show airs, but that’s going to be spring 2021, right. Is so women in publishing summit. Okay, great. We’ll make sure that you guys get information about that that’s coming up.
So this is actually a really good place to start. So let’s kind of start out with some basics here. What is the difference between self publishing and going to traditional route of having a publisher? And I understand that obviously it’s not, everybody can just go get a publisher there’s you have to have a certain audience and a platform. And so that’s really difficult,
but many people are self publishing. So talk to us About the difference. So it’s interesting because in the past, And in this time that I’ve been involved, Like we’ve seen self publishing explode. It started at about 2000. Well, it started a long time before that, but it didn’t really begin to be mainstream until about 2009, 10, 11,
12, with the addition of e-readers and Kindles. I mean, it’s hard to imagine what life was like, but it’s own. They’ve only been in our world for about 10 years and it made such a big difference. There are definite reasons why certain people would want to choose their traditional route other than the self publishing route. But for entrepreneurs, the self publishing route offers a really,
really great way forward because you have full control, you do it on your timeline, you make the decisions. So just to back up quickly, when you seek a traditional publishing arrangement, basically there are people who require that you go through an agent or through solicited manuscripts. And then there are a lot of smaller and midsized publisher that allow you to just go ahead and submit your idea for nonfiction,
which is where I would assume most entrepreneurs be. You have to draft a really detailed proposal. They want to know what other books are out there like it, how yours is different, what you can do with it. And I’ll, and it’s a great process for learning and understanding your book. But it’s a very, very timely process. Even if you’re not working through an agent,
even if you’re going directly to a publisher. And then when the book gets to the, or you don’t have to write the full book before you go traditional publishing, actually you just have to create that summary to send to them. And they decide yes or no. The advantages obviously of publishing is that you don’t have to figure out all the pieces of the puzzle.
You, somebody else is going to do it all for you, depending on the size of the publishing house, you may or may not get an advance. It surprises people to know that there are still people getting paid hundreds of thousands of dollars in advances, but those are usually like the Oprahs of the world and that Renee Brown’s a, you know, a hundreds of thousands to millions for somebody and in our sphere,
if you have a good book that the niche that they’re really wanting to fill and the ability to sell the book is a big, big factor. You may, you make it between a 10 and $50,000 advance. So for some people that’s a huge incentive, but for most entrepreneurs, self publishing professionally in a way that doesn’t look like you’ve just thrown it up on Kindle by yourself,
where you have a great cover design, you have great perfectly formatted interior design. You have a perfect cover. You’re following the industry standards. That’s a fantastic route because you can do it on your own time. You can choose what your cover looks like and work with the professionals to make it just right. You know, you generally have the audience already in place that you know is going to be interested in the book.
So definite pros and cons to both sides, but for a lot of entrepreneurs, I bet most of you are familiar with Pat Flynn. He’s self published his books. Um, there are a lot of entrepreneurs. If you were to start looking through Russell Brunson, the key is they’ve worked with professionals so that nobody can tell that their book is self published.
They created a publishing imprint, so that it doesn’t say published by Pat Flynn. It says published by whatever the name of the company is that he or the imprint that he created. So I assume the next question is How did you know? Yes. What is a publishing imprint? Yes. So this is awesome. So they publishers do it too. If you pay close attention to books,
sometimes you’ll see, I’ll make up a random name. Like I think Tarcher is an imprint of penguin, which is an imprint of random house, which is it’s like smaller delineations for the self publishing world. What the imprint means is that you’re creating a name associated to the books that are published. So when you go to Amazon or you go to books,
a million, or you go to wherever, it says published by Kat biggie press or purple butterfly press or Chrysalis press it. Doesn’t say published by Alexa, big Wharf. And you can create an LLC behind that. If you want to you, or it can be a DBA under your own business, some people will make it their company name. So you could have the Sweetlife publishing house or the Sweetlife press Sweetlife books.
People can copyright and trademark things obviously, but generally you can make it to be whatever you want it to be and associate it with your books. Just it’s another step to make you look just a little bit more professional, have a little logo, you know, all those kinds of things. Formation. I think when you dropped names like Pat Flynn and Russell Bronson,
and the fact that they self publish, I, a lot of people are like, wow, I really want to write a book, but I want to be taken seriously. And so when you drop names like you did, you know, some people didn’t know they self published because of that exact reason. And we do actually have our own, we have Sweetlife press.
So, so I have, I have written two books and self published, two books, and it was Sweetlife press in which we did that. And that’s exactly what we did. And so I do understand that process. One of the things that was really interesting as you were talking, I was remembering colleagues and friends and guests that I’ve had on the show.
And I still remember interviewing Denise Duffield Thomas and she was on the show, got a couple years ago and she had just released, I think it was chill preneur. And I remember one of the things we were talking about on that show was that they came back with her and they’re like, this is the cover of your book. And she’s like, why mrs.
Not what bit, you know? And she didn’t have a say, I mean, that’s the cover that the publisher chose for her book. And I still remember being in that interview and thinking, gosh, you know, I didn’t realize it would be that strict and they chose her cover and that was it. And she’s like, whatever I’m going with it.
I know it’s a great book, you know, but this is a cover. They chosen it. Isn’t what I had chosen. And so that’s a great example. And then also I still remember back. So I had a literary agent back in 2009 that approached me to write a book. I had little babies. I think my youngest was like two and a half years old.
And my oldest was only six. And he was so, so excited. It was such a great opportunity. And this agent was like, great, but the deadlines, I couldn’t meet the deadlines. There’s that too. And it was it. And it was exactly what you were saying. I was like, this could be a great opportunity, but I am in this business owner,
mom, life survival mode right now with these children. And there’s no way in hell. I’m getting you all of this by Friday. I mean, this is completely impossible for me. So I didn’t continue with that contract. I defaulted out of that contract. Um, and so as you’re, as you’re talking, I’m remembering kind of some of these things and saying,
okay, I get it. I get it. And just for our listeners, you know, it’s so interesting to again here, because you know, we’re always worried about our personal brand and what the perception is. And we’re going to dive here in a minute to the benefits of writing your own book, which is establishing you as an expert. So you don’t want to look like a cheapo because you’re publishing your own book,
right? You don’t want like, well, I couldn’t get a publisher, so I’m just going to put this out there and hope that people buy it. That’s not what we’re doing. That’s not what we’re talking about. So I love everything that you said. So my next question for you is when you self publish, where are your options to sell your book?
Okay. So you book anywhere these days. So it’s funny, the stigma behind, you know, the self publishing, like I remember years ago when I first was like, I’m going to self publish my book. Like the impression that a lot of my friends had was the first thing that came out of my girlfriend’s mouth was, Oh my gosh, please tell me it’s not going to be one of those horribly written books as 99 cents on Amazon.
But it’s growing beyond that. Like the industry around in the published books has grown so immensely that that’s really just the stigmatism that we carry, but that the rest of the world is moving beyond right now. So now I forgot what you asked me, but Oh, basically like where can you sell it so you can sell it on Amazon. But if I want my local bookstore to carry my book,
I can just Approach them just like a regular, why would any other retailer to sell my product and be like, here, here you go. You absolutely can. And in fact, that’s how most people, indie self published books are now showing up in Barnes and noble and target and all these places. It comes down to just like anything else, your ability to market yourself,
to know your target audience and how you approach them. So bookstores and libraries want to make money. If you know that your book is a good fit for the traffic, they get to their store. And even better, if you can bring something to the table, like I worked with one nonfiction author who approached the bookstore and she said, you know,
this is my book. I’d love to sell it here. But even better than that, it’s a natural book for a, she teaches a course from her book, right? So she was like, I’d also like to bring in my book club, my organization and these people in my workshop, basically, we’ll meet here once a month. And now it’s like,
wow, you’re bringing clients as well with a great love. That totally makes sense. But you have to have it positioned so that they can buy it. And that’s the thing that you can’t put it on Amazon and then go to a bookstore and say, will you please stop by book in your store? It doesn’t work that way. So those are the fine things that you have to learn about.
And those where the expert inside trading secrets When we work with you, I’d never would have even thought About that. Of course. Okay. So let’s talk about the benefits of writing a book. So what we’re talking about here, this isn’t a free book. This isn’t a freebie that you give away as a lead magnet. This is a book with your intellectual property,
your area of expertise, your methodology, your systems, your ideas, your direction, or, you know, precision about how to accomplish something. And it’s not this freebie that we’re talking about. So let’s dive into really, like you said, one of your areas of specialty and expertise is helping people figure out what the heck to write about how do you really guide people through making that decision in order so that it’s going to align with their business area of expertise,
or do you kind of have people that just start out as writers and the might not have a business yet? All of the above. It’s funny. It’s a wild world right now, as entrepreneurs, as writers as all of us, like the doors are wide open for us to create our own path, basically. So I have worked with authors who have come to me,
who have said, I’ll use my friend, Shelley, as an example, she was child has a food allergy. They also have a large family. And she has written a book about how to eat healthy on a budget. So dinner for a dollar is her thing. She wrote her book first and then she wanted to launch a business. So we had to,
you know, create the right path for that to happen. She came to me with her book already written. I helped her do the publishing and then launching and all of that kind of stuff. But then I’ve had other people who have come to me, you may be familiar with sparkle, hustle, grow Julie Ball, the founder of that subscription box for female entrepreneurs.
Like, I mean, No, I’m kidding. It’s created a wonderful product that people love, but now she’s growing her business beyond that. What can she do beyond subscription boxes? So she started a course, a boot camp for people who wanted to create subscription boxes and then a mastermind. So with her, when we were thinking about the right book for her,
it was how do I get something for that group of people who maybe aren’t ready for the course yet are still in that idea of, should I even create a subscription box and definitely aren’t ready for her mastermind yet so that she doesn’t have people joining her program, who aren’t ready for it, wind up asking a lot of questions because they’re very, very new and don’t know these things.
So her book, when we talk about the entryway to your big business funnel, it’s the perfect funnel because it’s a book about how to start a subscription box, what things you need to know, what her process was, what she went through. She uses a lot of examples from other box owners. And then at the end of it naturally, you’re like,
okay, if you’re ready to rock and roll, here’s your next step? Right? So she’s selling a book and she’s potentially growing her next level audience, hugely Perfect ideal audience. And it certainly can separate you and make you an expert in your space. I love that. That’s a perfect analogy as well, especially with the product funnel in that example.
So for people who are listening right now, they’re like, okay, I want to get started. I’ve been thinking about this for a long time. And I know you guys are listening out there and you’ve been thinking about doing this for a long time, because like 90% of the entrepreneurs and business owners I talk about have said, Oh, I really want to write a book.
I’ve been thinking about writing a book. So what are the steps to actually get started in this process for somebody who’s like, this is it, you know, 2020 is my year that I’m no longer going to drag my feet in this, but where on earth do I start? Okay. So to me, the starting places, always first and foremost,
identifying your goal of why you’re writing the book, what you’re trying to get to. And if you can identify that right away, like is it book sales because if selling books and getting on a best sellers list and getting interviewed on Oprah is your goal, then it’s a totally different path. If it’s to grow your funnel entryway into your business, if it’s to give a low cost.
So maybe you have a high end coaching program that lots of people can’t join, but they still want to know your knowledge then is it a solution for that level? Or is it, are you a newer business owner? And you’re really trying to establish your credibility to be known as the person on the street to come to talk to about these topics, to gain speaking engagements,
to be a step ahead of other people, applying for different opportunities, et cetera. So it can be a combination, but those are the general, like three different areas until you get to superstar status. And then it’s because people are telling you, you need to write a book, but for those of us who are not superstars yet, it’s generally one of those three areas.
So really having a clear understanding of that. Yeah. Let me just recap those so that people are really clear. So understanding obviously your why, so is it PR and you really want to be seen on Oprah, whatever that is. And so really making sure that media attention, I know that, and I do talk to a lot of business owners that are interested in that,
and that is obviously a really difficult path. And there are a lot of things that, that need to happen in order for that to happen, especially from an audience building standpoint, then as you certainly number one, number two, a product funnel. So as a product funneling into your other programs is a natural lead in and number three is just establishing your voice and growing your list as far as initially,
did I recap those correctly? Yes. And there are lots of in-betweens and you know, it’s funny because sometimes people will start thinking that they want to do one of those three things. And in the process they realize they have a personal story that they really want to share, and they can’t move beyond that until they write their personal story. It’s interesting.
Like once they get the idea started of, okay, I’m going to write a book, then they veer off in a different direction. You know, I’ve worked with authors who started have almost completely finished one book, and then they were like, I can’t move forward with that until I’ve addressed this issue. And then they wrote a book about how they overcame breast cancer and how other people can do that too.
And then came back to their business, this book. So, so cool. And not a surprise, not a surprise, you know, entrepreneurs we always want to create in creating is so healing. And I think for a lot of business owners, okay. So first figuring out step number one, figuring out what the purpose of what you’re doing is what’s next.
So for me, the next step is sitting down and figuring out the purpose of the book itself. Like, what is the reader going to get from it? Are you teaching them something? Are you sharing knowledge? You know, what are you doing? Are you doing it? How to book, are you doing a self help book? Are you doing a memoir figuring out that and creating an outline.
And this outline is a, sometimes a scary word for people, but it’s really just a, okay, I know I want to get the reader from a to Z and these are the things that have to happen between them and you jot them down in a list and that will help keep you on track and motivated to keep writing that book. So that’s step two.
Then step three is taking some time to either figure out all the steps in the process of publishing or determining. I just want to hire somebody to do all the steps of the publishing for me. And then you figure out who you want to work with basically, or you start researching how to do it yourself. Right? Name simultaneously. You’re writing your book.
Yeah. Okay. So let’s kind of talk about that for a minute. So for business owners that, you know, have a ton of things on their plate, how do you recommend people get the greatest productivity or focus? I know everybody’s different as far as writing, do you say, Hey, take a whole week and go on a retreat and rent a cabin in the woods and write your book,
or do you say, Hey, spend one day a week or three hours, or how do you usually actually recommend for people that are trying to balance all the things that, that they’re trying to balance and get their book? Really? I think the first thing to do is take an audit of what you’ve already created. And we do this through what I call my Quickstart program,
my QuickBook program, I’m actually working on the name of the system itself, but it’s, um, how to get what you already have available to you and start from there because the reality is most of us who are growing businesses have some level of team with us, right? So if you take that initial outline and you’re like, these are the things that I want to cover a next natural step is to pass it off to your VA and say,
go find everything that I’ve already created on this topic. Podcasts I’ve been on webinars, I’ve run all of that stuff and create that vault of information first. And then you can pick and pull things from that. It’ll also make it, if you work with a collaborative writer or someone who’s helping you get the book written that that’s an easy thing to hand off to somebody else.
But, you know, I think to be very honest, like this is where the overwhelmed just gets to them. Cause they’re like, Oh my gosh. Now I have to actually write a book and panic and breathing, you know, all of that, like, you’d be surprised how many people stop right there. They decide they’re going to write a book.
They know what the book is and then the brakes come on because it’s that next step that’s so overwhelming. But there are lots of ways to make it less overwhelming by starting with what you already have. You know, it’s so interesting as you’re going through this, this is our step by step process. Very similarly that we work with businesses to develop their signature programs and offers the outline,
assessing your assets. It’s the same exact process. And it’s true. You know, once they figure out what assets they already have that are going to accomplish a certain stage of that outline in this book, people just realize when they’re like, Oh my gosh, I have to actually go to work and do this. And you know, we have a lot of guys that listen to this show,
but working from home, which many people are and having the distractions, I think there is something super overwhelming about the ability to have an find uninterrupted time. And if, if like, if you’re like me, I have to get on a roll first. So for me to write, I actually have to be in the mood to write, I mean,
whether it’s music or working out first or lighting the dang candle or whatever it is, I have to be inspired to write. And I’ve ran into those problems before. And it’s actually even this way sometimes with recording this podcast where it’s like, if I’m not in the mood to create it, I’m just not creating it. So maybe if, you know,
if our listeners, if you guys are listening and you’ve been in this spot where you’re like, Oh my gosh, I have all this done. I want to keep writing my book. Maybe you’re like me and you’re super emotionally charged and you have to find the right environment or the right pre-activity to get your brain flowing. Because if somebody is like, okay,
well you have to sit down and write from 11 to one. You know what I’m not doing from 11 One writing and this just the way I personally am. Yeah. I completely agree with that. And that’s, that’s why I liked the idea of just sitting down and saying, well, one, you can always hire an accountability partner or a coach to like force you into one hour,
which is all it takes me is one hour to get somebody book out of them and sit down for one hour, go through all the steps that we just talked about and the preparation for it and have this skeleton, because it’s amazing the psychological difference that it makes. Once you have a list of topics just to start with, and then beyond that, you just start feeling.
It’s like, Oh yeah. I remember when I was interviewed on April beaches show, we talked about this, fill that in, in chapter six for that’s what I want to talk about, or you know, that type of thing, or you pick up your phone and you blocked somebody or however you communicate with your team. And you’re just like, here’s the brainstorm I have.
I know I want to include this information, this information, this information, go write it down on a list, go start, you know, filling in the gaps. It takes that overwhelm of sitting down and thinking, Oh my gosh, I have to spend these three hours just, you know, creating the best thing that ever happened. I’m sure.
You know what it’s like when you hire someone to write copy for you, whether it’s your newsletter or your sales page or anything like that, when you start from something that’s already existing, it’s so much easier to craft it and to recreate it, make it sound like you pull out the pieces you want than it is to start from scratch. Well, and that’s the power of working with somebody like you to do it.
So yes, if I had somebody like you to sit down with the deer, like, okay, April for the next hour, I’m going to pull, extract everything out of your brain. Then I would be there with bells on. And that’s exactly. I mean, that’s, that’s a difference. So those of our listeners that are really serious about doing this,
if you’ve been dragging your feet, It’s probably time to get somebody to guide you through this process. Like Alexa, When does the design come in? Is that usually something that takes really a while? Or do you write all the content first and then drop it into a design? How has that process fit into this? So our process and there’s, there’s lots of freelancers.
There’s lots of companies that help with this part of it. But what we do is we get the final edited version from the author when there’s no more changes. Obviously we do a proofread after that. So there may be small changes, but when the content is written, it’s been edited, it is done. Then we have a team of designers and we pick the right designer for the right project and we send it to them.
They do their designing skills because here’s the thing. I’m just going to be brutally honest here, because I can’t say this out loud to people, to their faces, but it breaks my heart when I go to a conference or an event and somebody’s speaking and I’m like, I have to get their book. And I go to the book table and I pick up their book and it’s not formatted properly.
And it looks a mess. And as a publisher, like I’m very in tune with what the industry standards are. So it annoys me probably more than the average person. I’ll, I’ll admit to that, but I can’t buy their book cause I can’t read it because that will drive me. So we have people who know, book, industry standards who know formatting,
who know how to do these different things. We send it to them. They do a couple of mockup chapters. We get back to the author, we say, does this look like what you were envisioning? Kind of like the same idea of designing a cover or graphics or anything like that. We come to an agreement and then we flow the entire book and then they get this beautiful lead designed and laid out book that then we can upload anywhere.
They want to publish their book. Fantastic. And it looks like the brand that they need to represent. And I think that that’s the concern that a lot of people have about self publishing is just really not knowing how to approach this and not knowing how to do this correctly in a way that is going to position them as a brand leader or as an expert or whatever their goal is for that book.
And I it’s the same thing. I mean, it’s like you, you love somebody and then you reach out and you go to their website and it’s not working or things are clicking, right. Or their logo sucks or, you know, whatever it is, it’s all part of the package. Right. And yet I think that another piece that people think is that it’s going to cost like thousands and thousands of dollars because you do see these programs that are like a $25,000 investment.
And I’m here to tell you that you can find people who will do it very professionally and very well, and you don’t have to mortgage your house to pay for the services. And it still looks really, really branded like you would want it to be. And that’s one of the things that we consider, like, are there fonts that you love? Is there a certain layout or things that you use in your things as business owners?
The branding is a huge part of what the cover and the interior looks like a hundred percent having an all uniform with that style guide across, well, this has been so helpful. I appreciate all of your information because you have given our listeners so many steps and so many different things to consider and there’s actions they can take at this point in time, or at least that they know that they can come back and tap into this episode again,
in the future when they are in fact, ready to go down this road, how can people get started? You have a quick start guide for our listeners. I want to make sure that everybody is getting their hands on also so that they can be in connection with you regarding your women in publishing summit and all of your services. Yeah, sure. So if you head over to write,
publish, sell.com, and if you go forward slash Quickstart, That’ll be kind of the freebie download on a recap on some of the things that we covered today, plus some additional resources on, on where to dig deeper, to find out more on those types of things. And then we also have write, publish, sell.com for jumpstart, which is our one hour workshop to help you outline your book.
So if you’re ready to go at that point in time, it’s a very small investment for that one hour to get that done. Wow. That sounds so awesome. That sounds incredible. I think everybody should join the workshop. I mean, one hour and, and see what you have after that and really getting inspired. I think that’s, that’s super great.
Thank you so much for being on the show. I can’t wait to continue to connect with you offline, personally. I know that our companies are going to be connecting again in a lot of ways in 2021. And so I’m excited about that and where can everybody find you on Instagram or LinkedIn and really what’s the best social platform for people to connect with you?
We’re pretty active on, on Instagram with write, publish, sell, and with the women in publishing summit. And I also have my personal account there. Alexa, big Wharf. I’m Alexa, big work on Instagram and then pretty much write, publish, sell anywhere you want to go. You’ll find us awesome. Thank you so much for your time.
I appreciate you. This has been amazing. Thank you. You’re welcome. Thanks.<inaudible> All right, guys. Thanks so much for listening to this week’s podcast. Again, this is the sweet entrepreneurial podcast and all the show notes and resources we talk about as well as our business development programs and how you can find Alexa and get started with publishing can be found by visiting us online@sweetlifeco.com
and get the insider scoop on everything podcast and all of the amazing business bonuses that we give you by joining us in our business community. You can do so right now, by cruising over to sweet life, community.com and create your business profile to network with other companies actually get traction. You might even find some awesome clients in there and get direct business support from me.
Thanks so much for tuning in. I’ll talk to you next week.

Episode 185: What Is A Landing Page and Why Do You Need One? – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Entrepreneur & Business Community App (free for life when you join in July 2020)  Last call to get Free for life! 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Businesses who want to grow your list and increase leads using digital marketing. 

Summary:

In this show we’re diving into digital marketing with landing pages including the difference between a landing page and other pages on your website, what should be on a landing page to increase conversions, and why every company should have a landing page they know works! 
 
A landing page is a standalone web page, created specifically for a digital marketing campaign. It’s where a visitor “lands” after they click on a link in an email, or ads from Google, Facebook, Instagram, LinkedIn, or where you market online. 

Highlights:

  1. The difference between a home page and a landing page
  2. How to use landing pages in your marketing 
  3. The anatomy of what to include in your landing page

Resources Mentioned:

For easy landing pages, built-in email marketing, and custom websites – TRY KAJABI FREE for 28 Days


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome to episode number 185 here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. We’re diving in more to digital marketing, and we talk about digital marketing a lot here on the show.
It’s one of our primary topics because it’s one of the most important strategies that small businesses and solo entrepreneurs need to know to leverage and use to grow your company. And so obviously it’s a hot topic and there’s so much, that’s always changing in digital marketing that many times on this show, we dive into a lot of advanced digital marketing strategies, but one of the most important things is coming back to the basics.
In some of these basics are the most common questions that we get when clients come to us, when they want to work with our company in order to grow their list, it’s really back to the nuts and bolts of what is a landing page and why do you need one? And so I thought it was time to do another podcast episode back to some digital marketing,
digital strategies and basics that every single company needs. And so all the show notes and everything I’m going to talk about detail here in this episode can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 85. This is episode number 185 here on the show. And we thank you guys so much for being faithful listeners and sharing this show with your friends. Now,
this is who this particular episode is for. This is for you. If you want to grow your list of leads, you’re either a new business or an established business. And here’s what you can expect in this show. We’re diving into the digital marketing and landing page basics, including the difference between a landing page and other pages on your website. What should be on your landing page to increase conversions.
I’m actually going to break down the anatomy of a landing page for you and why every company should have a landing page that, you know, works. This is again, if you are a new startup one man show, or if you have 25, 30, 50 hundreds of employees, you need to have a landing page that, you know, works.
Now a landing page is a standalone webpage, but we’re talking about the differences and the power of landing pages in today’s episode. And at the end of this show, you’re going to know the difference between a homepage and a landing page, how to use a landing page in your marketing and the anatomy of exactly what to include on your landing page to increase your sales conversions.
And so excited to share this show with you today. And as a bonus, if you haven’t yet cruise over, join us in our new sweet life entrepreneur in business, online community app. This is a last chance for you to join that app and have a free for life membership. It’s actually our brand new customized community we’ve built. We ditched Facebook groups and I could not be happier to be honest.
And so cruise over and join us totally for free and dive in. We do a lot of personal coaching in that app, and it’s a great place for you to network and grow your business. You can join us for free over there by visiting sweet life, community.com and register. Join us for free for life. Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s business training podcast.<inaudible> Okay.
On today’s show, we’re talking about what is a landing page and why do you need one? So a landing page, again, is a standalone webpage created specifically for a digital marketing campaign. It’s where your visitor lands. After they click on an email you’ve sent out or an ad that you may have run maybe from Facebook ads, Instagram, LinkedIn, or just Google ad words.
And it’s a landing page that has only one job. The job of this page is to increase the rate of conversions from a prospect to an actual lead on your website so that you can market to them after that. So the whole entire purpose of a landing page is to collect someone’s contact information. And so I’m going to dive into today exactly how to do this and build this page to magically,
make this happen. So inside this show, we’re going to dive into all these digital marketing tactics that a lot of digital marketers know, but you don’t have to be a marketing expert to know this. As a matter of fact, as a business owner, it’s your job to know digital marketing basics like this, and then you can delegate it to somebody that totally loves to do this stuff,
which frankly I don’t. And I know you probably don’t either, but many businesses, when you start up, you got to do this on your own. And so I’m going to make sure you have the tools here in this show so that you can build successful landing pages that convert. So we’re going to dive in and break this up into three parts today.
We’re going to talk in part one, I’m going to break down the difference between a homepage and a landing page. In part two, I’m going to share how to use a landing page in your marketing. And in part three, I’m going to share with you the anatomy of what should be on your landing page. And then I’m also going to share some insider secrets about some really cool things about landing pages too,
that are going to be really helpful for you to know, and is an added bonus to this show. We love Kajabi. We use Kajabi for landing pages, so you can actually create a 28 day free Kajabi trial just by cruising over to April beach.com forward slash Kajabi at any time when you’re listening to this and sign up for a free 28 day trial with them so that you can build really super easy landing pages,
but let’s go ahead and dive in here to the actual strategy of doing it. All right. Cool. Okay. So part one, the difference between a homepage and a landing page. So typical web pages on your site, they have a lot of goals. There’s a lot of things to do. When somebody lands on your actual website and your website is going to tell them a story,
it’s going to introduce them to your company. It could give a list of your services. When somebody lands on a regular webpage, they’re going to see a bunch of other things going on your navigation, your foot or menu. So all the way across the top, the pages on your website, which are typically your homepage about your company, you might have a blog or articles.
You might have a services page and a contact page. People are going to see all these different things to do on your actual website page. And they expect that. And the reason why a landing page is different is because a landing page is designed with one goal in mind. And that goal is to convert prospects into leads. So when somebody lands on a regular webpage,
it can be slightly overwhelming, which we’ve recorded many podcast episodes here on the show. You can search it in our website about actually how to build high converting website pages, but there’s still many options with a landing page. It only has one goal. And that one job of that landing page is to convert prospects into leads. And so we do this on a landing page by giving them only one thing they can do a landing page,
doesn’t have a menu, it doesn’t have the footer menu. It doesn’t have all these cool different places. They could click a landing page only has one call to action. Only one thing they can do. Only one place. They can click only one thing for them to focus on. And it only has one message. It’s only about the execution of the one thing that you promised to them.
They’d get by going to that page, which we’re going to talk about that in a second and how to use it in your marketing, but the difference between a regular webpage and a landing pages, there is no navigation on the landing page. There are not a million different distractions that somebody can do. There is one very simple form for them to fill out and they’re either want to stay there and give you their contact information and receive what you are promising them or they don’t.
That is it. Okay. So that’s the difference between a regular website page and a landing page, some landing pages, you can scroll down a bit and we’re going to talk about the anatomy and what can be built on this page and a lot of great landing pages. It doesn’t even scroll what we call below the fold. Basically. There’s no place to scroll down to.
The only thing somebody sees is above what that is, is the fold on their computer, but landing pages can also convert really well when they are somewhat longer, not super long. You’re not trying to sell them a huge online program or trip to Disney world just a little bit longer. And again, we’ll dive into that here in part three. So to summarize the difference between a home page and a landing page is a landing page has zero navigation and only one call to action.
Okay. Heart to how to use a landing page in your marketing. So we use landing pages to give away something for free in exchange for a lead’s name, their email address, and maybe a little bit of other contact information, these assets, that thing you give away for free, they’re called lead magnets and rightfully so they magnetize leads to your business.
So it’s gotta be something awesome and great. You’re giving them away. You’re giving away for free in order to attract this lead to this landing page. And examples of lead magnets are PDFs, newsletter, signups documents, videos, tips, blueprints, and we have literally dozens of podcast episodes recorded on how to create good lead magnets and amazing assets. I’m not going to dive into that on today’s show.
So again, if you want to learn how to create great free assets bruise over to Sweetlife podcast.com and you can search all of our episodes for those free and amazing business trainings, but for the point of what we’re talking about here, we’re talking about how to use a landing page. We use the landing page in order to gather the lead in exchange for the asset,
the lead magnet you are giving away for free, and there are multiple different ways to actually use this landing page in your marketing. You can run ads to this landing page. You can hyperlink the link to this landing page from different assets. So you could have a QR code where somebody is going to scan. You could hand out a flyer and have a pretty link,
which we’ll talk about that in a minute or a clear link to your landing page that you want somebody to go to. So you can hyperlink to this page from another asset or a document you can link to your landing page in your social media header. So, great example of this is putting the link directly to your landing page in your Instagram business bio,
rather than sending somebody to your huge whole website, where they can, might get a little overwhelmed and lost. We know a lot of companies, and we’ve worked with a lot of companies with a strategy of putting the link to only your landing page and your Instagram business bio header for the one purpose of generating that lead, especially if you were using it in social media posts.
So if you’re putting out videos and you’re doing social media posts, particularly for Instagram, and you’re saying, go click on the link in our biography. Then you want to make sure that link in your biography is in fact, leading back to where you promise them to where they can get this really cool asset. So again, it’s great to use this link to this landing page in your Instagram or your other social media headers.
You can also use the link to this landing page and share it in email marketing. So if you’re sending out a blast email, maybe to people that are already on your email list, but you want to give them something else, or you want to gauge an interest for a new product or a new service you have, or maybe create a wait list for something you’re about to sell in the future.
You can create an email and send a link to a new landing page to those people on your list. A landing page is also really important to make sure you have, if you’re doing any events. So if you’re doing trade shows, if you’re at sporting events, if you are out and about, you want to make sure that you have a signup that’s available at your table or your booth,
that links directly to your landing page, not your whole entire webpage, because people are super busy using it just to directly link people to a landing page where they can very quickly follow their name and email address is a really important marketing strategy for you to grow your list from your hard work of being at that event. And then lastly, you also can use your landing pages in your marketing when you are speaking on stages or on podcasts or on interviews.
So if you were getting interviewed on this show, and I’m sure you’ve heard many guests here on this show before, and I’ll ask them so and so, where can people find you and where can people get what you’ve promised? You’re going to give them for free. They’re going to say the link to a landing page, not their whole entire website, because they want to capture your information to build a relationship with you.
So again, how to use landing pages in your marketing can be running ads to your landing page hyperlinking from established documents you have using your landing page link in the URL of your social media header in email marketing in social media posts, lead generation out events and speaking on stages podcasts or on interviews. Okay. Are you still with me? All right. Again,
all of the show notes and everything we’re talking about for this episode and the whole transcription of this episode is found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 85. So if you want to take notes and you’re on the go and you can’t just remember episode number 185, and you can get all of this over at our podcast website, okay. Now part three,
the anatomy of a landing page. This is actually what you should have on your landing page so that it converts really well. So the very first thing is you need to have a headline. This is a unique selling hook, and it’s the takeaway of what you’ve promised them. This is usually a catchy statement, but it also has to align with whatever marketing you use to get them there.
So if you told somebody, Hey, come over here and you can sign up to get a free bottle of water, but then they landed on this page and in you’re selling them sunscreen, it doesn’t connect, right? So make sure that the headline aligns with whatever marketing you’re doing to get them there. So it should be a super awesome hook. Yes,
I want to be on this page and they should actually be able to read your headline and just know right then that they want to give you their information. But beyond your headline, you should also have also include supporting copy. So this is usually a short paragraph or bullets to give extra information, including the benefits of what they’re about to get takeaways, maybe a small list of deliverables,
and basically what they can expect from giving you their information, because their information is very private. People are not apt just to throw around their email address anymore. Like they used to be. So you better be clear about why on earth. They should give you this. And you do that in the headline and in supporting copy. The third thing that should be on your landing page is telling a visual story.
So this can be done by sharing an image or a few different images or a video. So a short video is usually best, but here’s the deal you really need to get to the point. Now a year from now, I could be recording this same episode in the strategies might be different, but right now at the recording of this it’s summertime 2020.
If you’re going to put a video on your landing page, it’s gotta be short and to the point, and it has to back up what your headline says and what your supporting copy says. People do not have time, and they’re not going to sit there and watch a whole long video to decide whether or not they want to give you their name and email address.
But if you don’t want to do a video images work really, really well too. So make sure that the image tells a story about why they’re there or what they can expect from receiving the free thing that you’re giving them that lead magnet. You’re giving them an exchange for their name and email address. So that is number three, make sure your landing page tells a visual story.
Number four, and probably one of the most important things on this page. Now we’re talking about that one form. Your landing page has one call to action. This is one form. One thing for them to do one little place for them to fill out. There are no distractions. There are no menus. There is no navigation anywhere on this page.
You can have a copyright at the bottom of the page and based on what your industry says, have a terms and privacy policy on the footer of your page, but we’re not directing somebody to your blog or even your social media handles. We want to keep them here on this page. So the important thing with this form is you don’t want to ask for too much.
So a lot of businesses I work with, they get really excited about this form. The owner will say, well, we can ask them this and in their troubles here and where are they located? And Hey, let’s get their phone number too. That does not usually work 90% of the time. That is not going to work. Obviously, every industry is a little bit different,
but in the case that we’re talking about using this landing page and social media and digital marketing strategies, that’s usually not going to work. Okay. You want to not get totally overzealous and you don’t want to. I asked too many questions. You get to do that later. You get to build a relationship and find out more about your audience later. Right now,
the number one goal is to get their name and their email address. So you even have a chance to build a relationship with them and ask them more questions. If you asked too much upfront, it usually turns people away. And they’re like, there is no way I’m giving this strange company, all of this personal data on me, in some cases with some landing pages.
Now, a lot of companies are even avoiding asking their first name. They’re just asking for an email address. I still really think it’s important to ask somebody’s name because we need their name for you to have a relationship with them. That is a much more personal relationship in the future. But I will say that less is better on this particular landing page.
And then a fifth option of what you can add to this page is social proof. So this would be, these are comments from other clients that you’ve worked with before. People who have used your products, maybe photographs of other people who have used your product or you working face to face or in any other way with other customers that are happy. Social proof goes a really,
really long way. You know, every company is out there saying, Hey, we’re rad. We’re so great. We’re maybe even the best, buy my thing or get my free app set that I want to give you, but nothing confirms you’re good at what you do. Like having somebody else show and tell a new audience. And so having social proof on this landing page is a very important thing.
If you’re new in business and you don’t have that yet. No worries. It will come. So in summary, part three, the anatomy of your landing page, you need to have your headline is number one, your supporting copy is number two. Number three is your visual story. So what story are you telling through video and or photography? Number four is your one call to action form.
That’s it? One thing that you want them to do? The one action you want them to take when they visit this page, make it clear and simple, easy, and number five is social proof. And so this is the summary of what a landing page is and how to use it in your business. How to use it for digital marketing on today’s show.
We talked about the difference between a homepage or general website pages and a landing page. We talked about how to use a landing page in your marketing. And now, you know, if you didn’t before the anatomy of what is on a high converting landing page, and here’s a few here are, if you tool other things, I just wanted to share with you guys too.
So number one, if you have your Facebook pixel installed on your website correctly, and if you’re a listener to this show, then you should have that done. If you do not have that done, then again, go back to our podcast website and Google Facebook trainings and teach you how to do it here on the show. But if you have your Facebook pixel correctly installed on your website or the place where you’re building your landing page,
if it’s not included in your website and a visitor does not complete your form, say they land on your landing page, but they’re like, yeah, no, I don’t really think, I feel like giving April my email today. No worries. Because that Facebook pixel is installed. You can really target that viewer through future Facebook and Instagram ads or LinkedIn ads,
whatever type of ads you are running, as long as you have that pixel installed on this page. So that’s cool thing. Number one. All right. So don’t totally panic. If you aren’t converting, getting somebody to land on your page is also great and gives you huge leverage from a marketing digital marketing standpoint. Number two, one landing page done well can and should be used for future campaigns and generating ongoing leads.
So when you, as an entrepreneur, as a business owner, create one lead magnet that works really well, that you know is always going to generate you new leads. That’s our goal. You want to have one awesome rocking lead magnet. You might want to have 50 of them. That’s fine, but you can’t even have two, three, four or five until we do have one that we know is awesome.
And it’s doing the job by generating leads for you. So we start with one really good one. That’s the cornerstone of lead generation for you. When you do that, you only have to build this landing page once and you can run ongoing ads to it. So although it might seem like a bit of work to get this set up, and frankly it is,
even if you’re doing it on your own or subcontract in and out, it’s a bit of heavy lifting on a tech side to learn all this. But once you do this once, and once you have it in place, once you really shouldn’t have to do it again anytime soon. So that’s cool thing to note number two, and then cool thing to note.
Number three is when you get this link to your landing page, it’s probably going to be long and ugly. And based on where you build your website, you might, or you might not be able to actually edit that link. If you cannot edit that link, then I highly recommend you create what’s called a pretty link or a tiny URL or something that you can share.
So when you tell somebody verbally the name of your link, it’s memorable. So let me give you an example of this. We have a landing page, which I shared with you as a bonus in the beginning of this episode for you to go try out our very cool partner website host called Kajabi and get a 28 day free trial. We love Kajabi by the way.
And it’s our number one, go to that. We refer businesses to, to build amazing websites and landing pages, which is why we recommend them. And we use them ourselves. But if I were to say this link of where to go get it, it’s terrible, right? I can’t even regurgitate it now or even remember what the heck it is,
right? So we created what’s called a short, customized, or pretty link. And then we forwarded the short, customized, or pretty link to the ugly ass landing page link. And we did this through our own website. So the link I’m going to tell you to go to is April beach.com forward slash Kajabi. It’s K a J a B I super simple.
You’ll remember April beach.com forward slash Kajabi to go try out this great landing and webpage resource. That’s what I mean by creating a pretty link. For example, if I was up on a stage and talking about how to set up landing pages, I would go on that stage and I would say, Hey, and by the way, you can go to April beach.com
forward slash Kajabi to sign up for this free trial. It’s an easy thing to say verbally that people remember. So cool thing. Number three is make sure that you create a shortened easy to say, easy to remember link and have it redirect to your ugly ass landing page link, because that’s really going to help you be able to increase conversions from anywhere.
And it’s going to help people remember what your link is. If they didn’t have a chance to go to it, or they didn’t have a chance to write it down. So I just wanted to give you kind of those other insider tips when it comes to landing pages and here’s the deal. The summary of this whole show is digital marketing can be done on a huge scale.
It can be done on a small scale, but the first step in digital marketing is building this landing page and doing it well, I don’t care if you are a one man show, or if you have hundreds of employees, the best way to generate leads for your business so that you can build a relationship with them so that you can sell your services or products down the road is by building a great converting landing page.
That’s super simple and only has one call to action. And the best place to build this page is in your own website. So that each time you run a marketing campaign to it, and all of your hard work from social media posting and all of your marketing outreach is converting people back to your website, even though you don’t necessarily have the navigation on the page,
your still able to track the visitors to your site. There are a lot of different softwares out there that work really well, that just build landing pages. Our recommendation as a company is best practice is to have your landing pages built on your own website. And the easiest way to do that is building it through a website platform like to Jabi. And that’s why we recommend them and use them ourselves.
All right, you guys, I hope you found this incredibly beneficial. If you haven’t yet, we would really love for you to leave a review. It helps other listeners find this business training show that frankly, a lot of business strategists and companies charge thousands of dollars for the cumulative business trainings that I deliver and the experts that we are just so privileged to have on the show deliver for you as well.
So we really appreciate you listening again. All of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 85. You can try to build your landing page on your own through the 28 day trial@kajabibyvisitingaprilbeach.com forward slash Kajabi, and you are invited to join our exclusive online community app by visiting Sweetlife community.com. See there, I just gave you three very clear examples of pretty links that go to landing pages.
All right, you guys hope you’re having an awesome day and I will speak to you again next week. Thanks for being the listener here. Bye. For now

Episode 184: 4 Pitches To Land Your Dream Business Affiliates – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the Live Stream with April Beach: 
“How To Create Winning Partnerships” 
July 16, 9am Pacific Time
Or Join our Community to catch the replay

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs who want to create partnerships with other businesses, but aren’t sure how to approach them correctly. Getting eyes on your new business or product can be hard. This episode is for those who need an instant boost of fans and followers with a little help from (business) friends.

Summary:

One of the fastest ways to grow your business is by borrowing someone else’s’ audience. In this episode, April Beach delivers 3 proven strategies you can use to create winning partnerships with other businesses for mutual benefits. The more valuable you are as a partner, the more other companies will want to promote and work with you so how you pitch your company matters!

Highlights:

  1. Have 4 strategies to choose from to pitch businesses for partnership
  2. Know how to pitch, when and what to say
  3. Discover the secrets we’ve used to have companies in over 13 countries promote us for free

Resources Mentioned:

Join the Live Stream with April Beach: “How To Create Winning Partnerships” July 16, 9am Pacific Time Click Here to Register
 
Or Join our Community to catch the replay
 
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hey, and welcome back to the show. I’m April beach, love chatting with you. And today is really Kind of a part two episode of what we talked about last week. You are tuned into the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast,
and I know, especially now there are a trillion different podcasts that you could listen to. And I really love that you’re here hanging out with me. Thank you so much for that. I love helping you build your business. That is what the Sweetlife company, my company and my team. That is what we do. We’re dedicated to helping you launch and scale your business through digital marketing and online business strategies.
And this show continually now for 184 episodes gives you the steps to do that, that most business consulting firms charge thousands for. So I’m so glad that you’ve tuned in if this is your first time here. Thank you so much. Here is what you can expect from today’s show today. I’m going to download four different ways to land your dream business affiliates.
But before we dive into this today, I want to make sure that you’ve tuned into last week’s show. So episode number 183, I covered, you know, exactly how to pitch partners, the psychology behind pitching partners, really how to determine whether or not a business or an affiliate is actually good for you to partner with. And I gave you the pitch steps.
So if you didn’t actually tune in last week, just pause this episode and go back to episode number 183. And listen to that because what we’re talking about today is a followup to what we talked about last week. And these are a lot of important strategies to discuss. As a matter of fact, this is some of the work that I do with my private business clients that I helped develop their pitches and their relationships sometimes with really high profile brands that other companies can’t even begin to penetrate.
And so this is really important information, and I want to make sure that you are getting it and absorbing it, and you’re taking the steps so that you can go ahead and put it into action in your business. So again, if you didn’t listen to last, week’s please tune into last week’s. And this is what you can expect from today’s show.
So this particular episode is for those of you guys who want to create partnerships with other businesses, you aren’t exactly sure how to approach them correctly. So we covered a lot of the foundation last week, but today I’m giving you four different specific pitch strategies. So we’re really going to be driving into strategy today. So if you want to get eyes on your new business,
or if it’s time to scale your business, or if you’re launching new service or a new product, or if you want to reach a new audience, then these are great episodes for you to pay attention, to and to take these strategies. And here’s what you can expect from this show. So, first of all, here’s what we know. One of the fastest ways to grow your business is by borrowing someone else’s audience and love that statement.
I love that quote, my friend, Cathy Hawn, who’s an online world-class online marketer. She’s been here on the show. She says that she says the best way to grow your businesses, to borrow someone else’s audience. And she’s totally right. So in this show, I’m going to give you the strategies that you can use to create winning partnerships with other businesses,
for mutual benefits. And here’s what you need to know. The more value you are as a partner, the more other companies are going to want to promote you and work with you. And so how you pitch these companies is super important. You only get one shot at making an impression to show your value. And we want them to think, Oh shit,
like I have to work with this company. This company is going to make me look better. This company is going to make me make more money. Our audience is going to love us more because I’m partnering with whatever your company name is. And so that’s what we’re talking about on today’s show. So the end of this episode, you’re going to have four strategies to choose from,
to pitch businesses that you want to partner with. You’re going to know how to pitch and exactly in what order, and you can figure out what your strength is in this area to move forward and pitch them strategically incorrectly the first time. And of course, I love giving you guys bonuses with these episodes, frankly, only you action takers and those of you that are really serious about growing your business in certain areas are the ones that actually take us up on these bonuses.
They are insane. So the bonuses that go with last week and this week’s episode is that I am teaching a live stream this Thursday, July 16th, totally free. And I’m taking your questions about partnerships. So I’m going to work with you and hear your questions and give you recommendations on strategies on how to reach out to your gold star partners. So companies that you want to partner with and the people that you want to promote your business and business affiliates.
So in order to get on that live stream totally free, you just need to join our new Sweetlife business community app. We have our own private community networking app. Super awesome. We just built it and you can join there for free by going to Sweetlife community.com. And once you join, you just click on events and you can register to join me in this Thursday’s live stream.
So we’d love to have you in there and very happy to help you build your business. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show strategies, all of the show notes from this episode and all the links that I mentioned in here can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one eight, four<inaudible>. Okay. So we’ve already established that you have to listen to last week’s episode.
If you haven’t, you aren’t even cheating. It’s just that what we’re talking about here, isn’t going to work as well, unless you’ve tuned into episode number 183, but the rule of thumb that you need to follow when pitching any company is you have to give first. So anytime you’re reaching out, we actually talk about this a lot on the show,
even outside of this specific context, but anytime you’re reaching out and you want to work with somebody, or you want to be part of what they’re doing, you always reach out by giving and you want to ask questions like, how can I help you? How can I help you serve your audience better? How can we support your goals as a business?
And again, we talked about that a lot in last week’s episode. So here in today’s episode, I’m not going to dive into that, but it’s important that you know, that those are the most important foundations for you to reach out first with. So you’re going to get four different pitch strategies here, and you can pick and choose which one you want.
And I promise you, we have not only used these strategies and both of my own companies. If you guys don’t know, I own two international business consulting firms and I have for 17 years, but this is what our clients use to land their dream business partners and affiliates. So you can definitely take what I’m telling you to the bank. All right.
So pitch option number one is to share great content for that desired partner to post. So here’s what we know. Content is King and great businesses are always looking for great content to deliver. So if you write excellent articles or if you make engaging videos, or if you create other types of content that can make that potential affiliate that you want to work with,
look awesome to their clients, do it totally do it. Content is one of the most powerful ways to create partnerships and connect with an audience. And so here’s some quick steps to do that. Number one, reach out with an Epic, original sample of your content that you want to share. So reach out, make sure it is really good, what you’re sharing with them.
And I want you to provide around three samples of your content. You can provide writing samples, you can provide video samples or audio samples. And when you’re reaching out, share with them, say, Hey, we have this great content. I would love for you to post it. This is original content, and here’s the most important thing here. It has to be original.
So this is something that you’ve never put on your own website. You’ve never shared across social media. You, especially with these gold star partners that you really want to work with, you want to provide them something original that can be found nowhere else, because that gives them a marketing advantage over their competitors. And it’s important for search engine optimization. So pitch number one is to share great content with your particular partners that you want to work with,
reach out to them and say, Hey, here you go. You’re invited to share this it’s original content. And obviously your company is going to get credit for the content. It’s actually a great way for you to be in front of your partner’s audience and they can see your face or hear your voice or read your writing. So that’s pitch option. Number one,
pitch option. Number two is to offer, to host an event for that particular affiliate companies are always looking to be the experts. So we, we all want to be seen as the leader in our space. So in this one, this type of pitch, you’re basically going to stroke their ego. And that gets really far in a lot of ways,
okay, this is business, it’s the truth. All right. So you can invite that potential partner to speak to your audience on a social media live stream in a video interview that you can host later and you can share with your audience, their content. So I know this isn’t going directly in front of their audience instead, you’re inviting them to come into your audience,
but it really does make them see you in the beginning of this relationship is a valuable resource and somebody that they want to work with. So you would invite that potential partner to speak to your audience and tell them that you’re going to be sharing this content with your audience and making sure that you’re tagging them when you’re sharing the content and you’re including them in it.
And here is like a gold star bonus. Nobody does this. You guys have to do this. I promise you it will be the advantage. It’s also one of the most important ways that one of our seals, our logo seals, and one of my first companies became internationally recognized. So here is the secret. Are you ready? Okay. Create a graphic logo.
It’s not your business logo necessarily, but create a version of a logo that your partner can use and share across social media. This logo could be an as seen on or as featured by your business name or proud partner of, and then your business name, whatever it is, create graphics for them to pimp out on their social media. Sorry, I just said pimp out hope that doesn’t offend somebody about on their social media put on their website.
And so they could beep up like as seen on kind of as if you were in our podcast. If you were on my podcast, you’d get a whole entire zipped up file of a ton of promo logos that you can use saying as seen or heard or featured on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. Same thing. I want you to do this for your desired business partners.
And the second secret bonus is to create done for them, social media graphics. So take their headshots, put that little logo on there and send back images to them so they can put it out on their Instagram stories and their LinkedIn content and wherever else they’re established on social media. So you’re literally doing all the work for them. You’re inviting them to come teach to your audience and not only is that great for them.
And they’re seeing you as a great potential partner to work with more in the future, but frankly it makes your business look really, really good, especially those of you guys who are new in business in the first couple of years, bringing in experts, bringing in partners, makes your business look like the GoTo. And it’s an important thing to do. So that is pitch.
Number two is to invite the partner to come in, to teach or to speak. And I gave you the gold star marketing strategies. After that pitch, number three is to teach for them. So this is identifying their needs, identifying maybe some of the things they aren’t delivering as far as content to their audience and reach out and offer to speak for them,
reach out and offer to teach. And you do this by sending them speaker one pager or immediate press or pitch pack. We’ve talked about this on numerous shows before. If you haven’t tuned into our shows on how to land any speaking gig that you want, then make sure after you’re done listening to this episode, all you have to do is cruise back to Sweetlife podcast.com
and you can search all of our shows for that particular content and find all the strategies that teach you how to do that as well. So here in pitch, number three, we’re going to establish you as the expert. So you want to reach out with a list of topics that you can teach to their audience. Again, you want to do the research.
You want to identify what you feel like their needs are maybe some weaknesses within their market. And you want to provide the solution to that. You want to fill that hole for them and offer to teach for them at no charge. This could be a live stream on their social media. This could be in an event. This could be just frankly, creating a video and letting them post it on their YouTube channel,
whatever it is, reach out and offer to deliver expert content for them. And then pitch number four is to collaborate, to create something new. This is when you reach out really authentically and just say, Hey, I’d love to discuss the opportunities to create something new together. It can be a new product. It can be a new service or an event.
It could be a live stream collaboration or an online summit. It could be even a local event. The sky’s the limit when it comes to collaborations. So let me give you a good example of a case study of this in real time. My other company, I own baby planner inc, is the international leader in business consulting and development strategy for companies that market to new and expecting moms.
And there is a company that we partner with that also offers business coaching for that niche. They train sleep coaches, and they really want to provide the business strategy of developing a company, but that isn’t their expertise. So we are working together to create a collaboration where we bring in our business development trainings for that niche market and their expert sleep certifications. And it’s a complete business package if you will,
for these types of professionals, again, super niche, super specific. And so when you’re thinking about what this could look like for you think along those lines, like what can you create with other businesses that reach the same audience, but they may be missing something that’s different for every single industry. I just wanted to give you a case study and an example of some of the ways that we do this and that we are currently doing this right now so that your wheels can be turning.
So again, we’re developing the business development coaching, and they’re developing the skill set coaching. If you have some sort of a collaboration like that, that you can do within your niche, do it find it that is pitch number four, a collaboration to create something new that has never existed, or that it’s never been as awesome as you and your new ability a business affiliate can make it together.
All right. So here’s a recap of four very specific ways that you can pitch to land your dream business affiliates. Number one is sharing great content for that affiliate to post. Number two is hosting an event and inviting that affiliate to come and teach for your audience with all of the seals and logos and marketing. Number three is teaching for them to their audience.
And number four is collaborating to create something new. Now, let me speak to those of you guys that are brand new in business so that we’re just talking about the elephant in the room. I know that you might not have a huge list yet. That’s okay. You want to find the partners that may also be new and create partnerships with newer companies or companies that are looking to expand,
or maybe at the same stage of business development as you are. If you are a brand new business and you’re reaching out and you want to partner with Proctor and gamble, that might be a little stretch at first. Is it doable? Yes. We’d done it with clients before. Yes. Using these same four strategies. So go big, go for it.
But I also want to say, if you’re not really sure about what sort of collaborations you want for your company, maybe starting out with a business it’s in the same development phase or a little bit ahead of where your company is, is a great place to start. Okay. So that’s today’s episode. I hope you found this incredibly informative and taking action on it right now.
So to take action, choose which collaboration method you think is going to work best for your company to start and identify three top business affiliates that you want to reach out to right now to develop this relationship again, choose your pitch and choose three different affiliates that you can reach out to. And you can develop this collaboration. And the goal is to borrow their audience to grow yours.
It’s absolutely synergistic. It’s perfect for both businesses in giving and building mutually beneficial business partnerships and brand collaborations is really the way businesses are going to grow in the future. And this is a way to get started in that. Thank you so much for tuning into this show. I love chatting with you guys. If you haven’t yet, I would really appreciate it.
If you cruise over to Apple podcasts and left us a review, we read them all the time and along those lines, I just wanted to give a special thanks to a podcast reviewer, Terry Schmidt. Thank you so much. She said it’s practical, relevant, no nonsense podcast. April is extremely generous with the amount of detailed time-tested business advice that she gives on each podcast.
She’s very clear on who can benefit from each training and delivers the content in a way that makes it easy to take action right away. If you’re an entrepreneur working to launch scale and grow your business online and appreciate down to earth and relevant advice, I highly recommend this podcast. Thank you so much, Terry, for that review. And we really do appreciate all the reviews and sharing this podcast with your friends.
You can just click up arrow as you’re listening to this show and share it on your Instagram stories. And especially if you’re listening to it on Spotify, we are on every single podcast platform, even Pandora now, which apparently you really don’t listen to Pandora unless you’re over 40 like me, but I love Pandora. So it was really, it was really exciting for me when we got on Pandora a few years ago.
So I appreciate your time. I hope you guys have an awesome week. It’s always great to pour into your business. It’s such a privilege to do so, and we’ll catch you next week. Again. Join me for the live stream this Thursday, July 16th. If you want personalized business strategy and help to create your partner pitch to get in there, you just go to Sweetlife community.com.
Join our online community app and you will find the invitation to join us. Live this Thursday. All right, you guys have an awesome week. Talk to you soon.

Episode 178: How To Use LinkedIn To Grow Your Business Organically – April Beach and Judi Fox

Judi Fox SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for anyone trying to grow their LinkedIn connections to intentionally grow your business (new or seasoned) to connect with the right people and build professional relationships. 

Summary:

LinkedIn is the best B2B social platform that exists. However, few people know how to use it, what to post, or what strategy to follow to make the right-profitable connections. In this show, Judy Fox, LinkedIn Expert, shares a simple and powerful strategy to accept the right connections and her 3 part system on the best content to share. 
 
At the end of this show, you will know what to do with your LinkedIn connections, how to increase the visibility of your content and what to post, when. 

Highlights:

  1. Have a simple LinkedIn connection strategy
  2. Know the types of content you should be posting on LinkedIn
  3. Understand how to organically grow engagement with the right people at no cost

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi there, and welcome to episode number 178 of the sweet life business podcast. My name is April beach. We have not met before. I teach Me as an entrepreneur is to develop programs,
courses, online business options, to grow and scale your business faster. So glad to connect with you here and everything we talk about is delivering a business strategy or a marketing strategy to help you achieve the goal of business growth, which leads to lifestyle, freedom to create the life you really want with your business growth profits. Today on the show, we are talking to those of you guys who are interested in growing your LinkedIn profile.
So LinkedIn it’s been around forever. You and I both know that, but very few people know how to use LinkedIn. And a lot of people still believe that LinkedIn is just a place to pop up your old resume and leave it there. And as a matter of fact, it’s changed so much in the last couple of years that this will be the fifth,
maybe even the six different podcast episode that we have recorded about LinkedIn, because I really feel like it’s an important platform for you to grow your personal brand or your company brand and for you to connect with your ideal clients and increase your sales. But the truth of the matter is, is I don’t believe that my company has been using LinkedIn as well as we could.
As a matter of fact, if I had to rate the way I have used LinkedIn on a scale of one to 10, it would probably be a four and that’s not good. That’s not passable for profitable business. And so today’s guest, I actually hunted her down and so she could share resources and strategies to help all of us increase our sales and the right connections on LinkedIn.
So this episode is for those of you guys who are trying to grow your LinkedIn connections, intentionally want to grow your business, whether you’re a new business or an established business, and you don’t know how to do it on LinkedIn, the last two episodes, if you were tuning into the show one 77 and when 76, my friend AIJ Wilcox was on the show and he was talking to us about how to grow your business on LinkedIn,
by paid advertisement. But this episode is all about how to organically grow your business on LinkedIn, without spending a dime to we’re going to dive in with today’s guest at the end of the show, you’ll know what to do with your LinkedIn connections, how to increase the visibility of your content and you’ll know what to post. And when, so this show is going to help you have a simple LinkedIn content strategy,
no, the types of content you should be posting on LinkedIn and understand how to use them organically to increase your engagement and connect with the right people without spending a dime. So excited to dive into this show with Judy Fox and with you. So let’s go and do it.<inaudible> All right, you guys are welcome back to another episode of this sweet life business podcast.
I am here with duty Fox. And let me tell you a little bit of the background story of how Judy got here. First of all, you guys I’ve been on LinkedIn forever, as long as I think that you can have been on LinkedIn, but I’ve never really figured out how to use it, how to leverage it for my business. And I knew that there was some strategy that I was missing.
We know video is King meat. We actually have done LinkedIn shows two years ago, but it still didn’t connect in my own brain. And regardless of what my team says and tell something connects in my own mind, it’s just honestly, just not going to happen. And so I’m sitting on like 120 LinkedIn invitations, and I knew there was some strategy that somebody out there knew in order to help me connect on a deeper level with the right people on LinkedIn.
And so I went on a hunt and I think it was in one of my Facebook communities I posted or somebody else’s community. I posted other, I said, I need a LinkedIn connection expert. I want them on my podcast. I need it for myself, selfishly and personally. And I know that all my clients need it and millions of other business owners and professionals need it as well.
So we are joined today by Judy Fox. And let me just read her bio and then I’m going to turn it over to her. She’s super impressive. So we’re both gonna have a great time today and we hope you guys do too. All right. Judy Fox hit 3 million views in 2018 on LinkedIn and has been featured in inc com as a topic. My video marketer and speaker at vid summit,
social media week, video marketing world broadcast your authority, authentic leadership summit, and more or less with over 18 years of experience in business development and sales, Judy Fox is a superpower positioning clients online and his authority as an authority in their space, building highly engaged audiences and getting more inbound opportunities. Now, Judy, I want you to introduce yourself and as you do it,
instead of me reading this, cause sometimes that’s just weird. Yeah, it does. But you have something here. Call them LinkedIn business accelerator. Talk about that. And then we’re going to dive into a ton of different LinkedIn strategies for those of you that are entrepreneurs and business owners here on the show. But first of all, what is, is business accelerator?
Because the fact that there is even a LinkedIn business accelerator tells me and many of our listeners that we’re missing the boat somewhere on making more money by leveraging LinkedIn. Yes. Oh my gosh. So I can’t even express how excited I am by the LinkedIn business accelerator because people who implement this literally hit millions of views either in weeks to months. And they are being asked to get on radio shows,
asked for podcasts. I have one client literally got shared by Arianna Huffington who has 9 million followers on LinkedIn. So there are people on LinkedIn who are getting access and getting featured in Forbes. And I just had another client get featured in BBC news. So, I mean, I could go down the rabbit hole for LinkedIn business accelerator, but the point of it is it’s a 90 day program.
It’s a container of leveraging the, what you really need to new do, and not all the things you need to do. What can you do in five days? And I will show you that it will grow your profile views by 2000%. I’ve had some clients literally get 200000% increases because it is just putting the gas pedal down on actually the things that work for what you do in person,
how to show up online and do the same thing. And it’s like a translator. Okay. First of all, we’ll put all of the links to the show notes. So you can find Judy and all of this information in the show notes for this week’s episode, which is number 178. So a couple of things we’re going to cover today. And I like most people have numerous questions about,
well, one of the things that I love about LinkedIn is it’s really powerful for companies like mine, which is strictly. And we just had Aja on the show, you know, AIG and Aja. And I jammed for a couple of episodes on paid reach through LinkedIn. Then he has his own take on that because that’s his area of expertise. But first of all,
what type of businesses do you think should be active on LinkedIn right now? Oh my gosh. So this goes back to my human. I even put this in my profile. I do human to human marketing. So as I mentioned, I have 18 years experience and I started my career as a chemical engineer. I then moved my way up. The corporate ladder in a fortune 500 company was being groomed and trained for the C suite and throughout that entire process.
And especially at some points in my career, being that business development, the seller, the Dewar role throughout all these corporate experiences that I’ve had. And the biggest takeaway is I am a human gatekeeper. I’m still a human being who was the gatekeeper to sometimes millions and millions of dollars at these corporate offices, corporate contracts, proposals requests for proposals. So all of these processes,
I kept saying to myself, I’m being sold to I’m selling other people like it’s this whole circle. And I kept asking myself, I’m just another human being that’s in that gatekeeper position. So I come to a conclusion that if you are human being and you are wanting to amplify the message that comes out beyond yourself. So say for example, we are attracted to other human beings and that’s why we have these influencers that we hire and we pay good money for.
And they advertise our brand. Will, can you imagine having your entire company filled with influential people who are leaders of your company, they can be that way on LinkedIn. And it’s a very natural space for them to be that way on LinkedIn. So it’s almost like we’re just amplifying the message of humans. And that’s why I say almost anyone can be on LinkedIn.
I know that sounds really blunt, but I’ve seen artists who are doing amazing. There’s a woman named Casey who shows her artwork and she is getting a hundred thousand views sometimes on her artwork. And she’s selling out in minutes because she’s visible. We know she exists and we can grab onto her content. And, and we can only imagine how many people are online.
Every single need that you have as a human is still a part of you. When you go to work, sometimes you’re willing to pay even more. Wow. Cause you want it done for you. You want that painting that she put out there because it looks amazing. Maybe it’s great for your corporate office and you want to buy it. Maybe it’s great for your background of your podcast or your video and you want to buy it.
Do you see what I mean? Like the corporate and professional world, I feel like it’s all merged now. I love that example. And I love that case study. I actually have a good close friend of ours will day it’s real day art it’s on LinkedIn and in his paintings, I can’t even venture to say what some of his opinions began at,
but he is on LinkedIn. He does really well. And I feel like I’ve seen that expansion, especially in the last two years where also being a mother and working from home forever. I’m seeing also things that I would never expect to see, but I think I personally pick up on it, just who I am as a human being, things about breastfeeding or things about self care or things that aren’t so much lack and white.
This is business things that don’t appear to be, as you were saying, corporate black and white content that they’re silent. And The only reason I have to say something so quickly is because for how many years were we told what is considered corporate, but it’s also considered corporate because they didn’t necessarily have as a male dominated industry that I’ve been in, in the engineering world.
Those conversations wouldn’t have existed anyways. So I am the leader that I want to be in the world and the leader that I want to be allows conversations for both male and female things that we all face. And just because men aren’t breastfeeding in the workplace, it doesn’t delete that. That is still a professional conversation that needs to happen because it’s work related to talk about raising children.
And it’s not just a female thing. It’s men and women raising children. And I, I challenged, like I love Sarah Blakely’s LinkedIn profile. If you go to her profile at the bottom of her about section, which is making it very clear that I memorize people’s about sections. She actually says my goal and mission in life is to balance the masculine and feminine energies Because that Is a powerful mission and goal.
And I, I love, I love following her. She was just on a LinkedIn live on LinkedIn. She did it from her RV where she’s on the road with her husband and she is still running her company and doing all the things, but showing up as a parent, showing up as we’re parents and all parental conversations matter, They do, especially.
Yeah, that’d be a rant, especially now in the last, you know, in the last three months. And I’m actually looking forward to the way that business models are going to change that it is much more holistically incorporating our role as parents, as well as leaders and executives, business owners and everything else. So I’d love that. Okay. Yeah.
You and I could jam on that all day, right? Here’s my primary question. We talked about it a bit and started before we started recording. The first strategy I would love for you to share is the answer to the question. What the heck do I do with all of these crazy amount of LinkedIn invitations? I know there’s a strategy behind it and for our listeners,
it just randomly sure. I’ll accept your invitation. It’s just random. Just click button, easy to accept. There is a deeper business relationship low that we need to mind. And I know that there is, but personally in my business, I do not have a strategy to do that. And that’s why I hunted you down. And so I loved your strategy.
And can you please teach us your strategy? You rule of thumb in how you approach connections on LinkedIn. So they immediately are the right connections for you. Yes. So first I love that we’re diving into the direct messages because I have spent my most of my business with my direct messages, creating opportunity, creating business. That’s where it’s all going down and the is on LinkedIn,
but it’s not going to happen if we give our attention and spread ourselves too thin, we all understand that as business owners, we can not be spread too thin because when we spread ourselves too thin, we’re not really serving anybody. So I love the idea of taking radical ownership. This is my direct message experience. You’ve come into my world. You are invited in and I get to decide where I want the relationship to go,
not you. So I really like that. That is clear in my head. I don’t have to tell them that, but that’s what I’m thinking. It’s my mindset. And that I get to look at your profile except you very, I except pretty quickly, I would just say accept, except, um, that one looks a little something’s off. I go with gut instinct and sometimes I reject or click ignore.
I would say it’s 80, 20 rule, 80% of the time. I’m accepting connection requests. 20% of the time I’m saying ignore because something just looks off. You kind of know, maybe they don’t have a profile picture or maybe they don’t fill out their profile completely. And they don’t have, they have weird letters in their about section something, but I don’t click into their profiles,
just judge on quickly looking at their titles, looking at their profile picture and their name with that. You can turn around and if you want to take action on, like you said, they’re on my turf. They could be somebody I could warm up. They wanted to connect with me. I could turn around and say, thank you so much for connecting.
Cause I’m just acknowledging. There’s no message. There’s no nothing. You’re just starting from scratch. And we’ve heard over and over. And I was just listening to Shaylene Johnson the other day. And she reminded me of there’s a million people reminding us it’s 20 to 30 touch points before somebody becomes a purchaser, especially if you have a higher ticket or high trust business.
So why would we think that any conversation in the first message is going to convert, we have to have way more touch points. So what I do is I have a generic message that says, thanks for connecting. I love to get to know new connections in the comments on the platform, see you online, feel free to follow my hashtag Fox rocks,
Doody Fox. And by having my own personal hashtag, it creates a very easy light pitch clickable link that sends them to my most recent content. Love it, bam. They don’t have to navigate through my profile. They don’t have to navigate to where you find your most recent posts. Cause every once in a while, somebody will say, I can’t find where your most recent content.
It literally takes you to a newsfeed of Judy Fox Of Judy foxes, hashtagging, and just a side step. So for people that have no LinkedIn started using hashtags, what like two years ago now, but they do well. And so some of the hashtags that I follow on LinkedIn, they only have, you know, a few things coming up in the feed.
Whereas if you all have that same hashtag on Instagram, for example, you’re buried in millions and millions of posts. LinkedIn is there yet. And I love that hashtags in general, but I also love that you have your own branded hashtag, which is so cool and what a great way. Okay? So somebody sent you an invitation. You don’t click on their profile.
I don’t know if I like that too. Sometimes that LinkedIn always tells people their profiles. You don’t necessarily know their profile judging USS just based on the information from the invitation. And then you copy and paste this super nice relatable response saying, Hey, great, you want to connect with me? You know, go ahead and follow My hashtag. Yes.
What is this do at this point in time? What happens after this? So what happens is I either have people say, Oh my gosh, that’s great. You have a cool hashtag or the responses I get are I’m excited to engage in the comments or, you know, if they are respecting the boundaries, the only other message that is freaking awesome is when they turn around and they say,
I’ve been following you for awhile and I’ve been commenting and I love your content. And then isn’t that a great next conversation because I know you’ve had 10 to 20 touch points potentially. So you’re finding out by just that message, by the way they respond. Number one, are they going to respect the boundaries, which you didn’t make them harsh boundaries? You just said,
I like to do this. This is my it’s like a soft boundary. And then if they push back with like, that’s awesome, I have been watching your content. I really blah, blah, blah, something, whatever. Maybe they start a conversation. That’s super hot because you’ve positioned yourself already. And you wouldn’t know that unless you did that message.
It’s without pushing them to tell you, I hate the, why did you connect with me? Right. Okay. Now I have to do all this work to explain. It almost feels defensive. Whereas this one opens up the door. It’s like a slight door, but it also opens up the door to just being amazing comment conversation on the public platform.
And if that happens, you’re just gaining attention on your content, you know, a thousand more views or one more comment or one more share. Yeah. And at that perfectly brings us into the next thing that I want to talk about. What an amazing organic way to increase, increase the eyes on your content. I mean, this is brilliant in so many different ways.
I’m super stoked to be connected with you and love learning from you already, Kelly, my assistant is going to be like, Oh my gosh, April’s going to have 10,000 things for me to do on LinkedIn, send you a connection request. You send me a connection request so I can practice my new DM and come up with my experience. It too.
It’s fun to make your own gifts. Oh, okay. That’s alright. I have a waving. Hello gift. Are you serious? That’s another way to give people one more experience in LinkedIn direct messages. That is not the same as everybody else. I’m not trying to pitch. I’m waving. Hello. And it’s just a nice gift that I can upload really quick.
And it’s in the gift library. I love that. All right. There’s a million things that you can do is send Judy’s gift to you, everybody Fox and shout out to Chad who helped me first launch my gifts. Yay. Thank you, Chad. Okay. All right. So Let’s talk about the content we’re posting on LinkedIn. You have three different personalities that you talk about as recommendations for ways that individuals can show up on LinkedIn.
Can you dive into those three different personalities and how to operate within and why they’re really Huntly important? Yes. So instead of thinking, we always come from a place of, I need to be creating content for my business. I need to attract the right clients. And I always tell people, if you start with these three pillars of leadership voice, so it’s this idea that a leader is recognized by the way that they walk through this earth,
by the way that they show up online. And we kinda know when we see their content, but we don’t always put our finger on it. But if you break it down on LinkedIn like this, and I’ll share, I’m about to share, I’ll start with the opposite first, which is too many people think, and they get on LinkedIn, they come from this,
how can I help you? And that tends to be a very, very low hanging fruit that a lot of people grab onto. And they think that their content needs to come from, how can I help? How can I show up for my ideal client? So this is the opposite. So I want you to delete the world of how can I help you?
It’s not a bad world, but it hurts us. It really does. It hurts our positioning because it doesn’t position you as a leader. It positions you as a helper, helping the helpless and people on LinkedIn don’t want to be helpless. They want to be empowered. They want to also show up as leaders. If you have all of your employees underneath you and you are lifting them up and making them feel amazing,
you’re not helping them. You are empowering them. So we’re going to switch to an empower language. And then the next thing we’re going to switch to is the three categories, which are the challenger, the creator and the coach. So I’m going to start with the coach. The coach shows up as a go to resource. You know, when you have a boss that you can trust to go to,
or a leader, doesn’t even have to be a boss, you have a colleague in your world and you know that you can go to them. When you say, actually you did that. When you were saying, Hey guys, I need to crowdsource for a person to be on my podcast about LinkedIn. You already mentioned that. So you’re showing up as a go to resource and you’re allowing your community to show up as go to resources in the comments.
So instead of just holding court and preaching at us, you were saying, Hey everybody, I know you all are leaders. It’s implied by me saying, I need a go to resource, total different mindset. Okay? Yeah. So then you’ve got that energy and you can say, these are my top tools for working from home. These are my,
this is my mindset hack. That was one of my videos I did recently where I broke down my mindset hack. That’s a coach. That’s go to resource for sharing what works for me, but not telling me it has to work for you just saying, this is what I do. What do you do? How can you show up as a leader in my comments?
Right. Fascinating. Okay. So that’s the leader personality. And then the second one you mentioned was the neighbor personality really ENT. Yes. The creator personality. For example, I was mentioning Casey is doing her. Um, we think creative types, but we also think so she’s showing us her behind the scenes, TimeLapse of her video and the psychology behind that is a before and after energy.
We freaking love that because there’s something that connects in our brains to say, how did a creator get from here to here? It’s sharing the journey. So we love the journey we love seeing how did somebody earn six figures? How did somebody get from barely making ends meet to a seven figure business? Like how many freaking shows do we want to listen to online and podcasts?
So there’s that energy. And then the other part of that energy is step-by-step actions. So when we, as a creator can show up either with that before and after energy, the journey energy, the, those types of posts do so well because they’re positioned with that mindset to think, how could I take another human being from a to B, Love it.
I would say that my downfall is that I would just want to hang out in that personality all the time, just because I’m a teacher, that’s what we do here on the podcast. So I think all of my posts would be like, okay, step by step to go from here to there. But you could and sprinkle in the other ones. Yeah.
But I feel like that’s not, it’s just not deep enough, the way that we’re doing it as a company, to be totally honest. I mean, I’ll just throw my own company under the bus here on some of these shows to be like, we suck at this right now. And that’s why we’re, we’re recording this show. You know? And I really do feel like this is something that as you’re teaching and as I’m learning,
and if you guys are watching behind the scenes on the video, as I’m taking notes, I have like crazy Fox notes, scratched all over my paper, hashtag Fox or hashtag, you know, as we’re, as we’re doing this, I just, I can see myself being like, okay, I think maybe that’s all you do. And it’s just a little almost to the point where it’s redundant or shallow or something,
there’s something off about it. But these bats were the last Leadership style allows you to share a bit more of your, I don’t know what to call it, but like it’s called the challenger energy. So where you come across as learning from your mistakes, sharing some of the vulnerable parts of your business. And that’s probably where you can show up in all these other areas and be vulnerable with the coach saying,
Hey, I need a resource because, and that’s the vulnerable part of the story. Maybe there’s a part of that story that is vulnerable to you. But the challenger energy really does have a curious energy. I’m curious why this failed. I’m curious why it took me 10 years to get where I am, you know, and the figure outable energy as Marie Forleo would say,
it’s the energy of wrestling with something and showing that part in that post. So the way challengers show up is the curious questions. It’s figure outable, but you could have a figure outable energy together where you say, let’s figure this out in the comments below. I need to determine how to start a podcast. And I am struggling. There’s a million platforms to start on and it’s a little bit of the go to resource,
but you’re potentially opening up more of I’ve made mistakes along the way. How can I reverse share so you can learn the lessons along with me. I love that. So that would be an example of that Using yourself to the next level too. Oh, okay. That makes sense too. There’s the challenger from the past when you challenge your past, but you can also challenge your future.
And I, I meant to mention that because I didn’t want to leave you hanging with only looking at past mistakes. You can challenge the future. I have one client that made a post and we decided to do a challenge of reducing our sugars together. And so there’s that that’s still a relevant post for LinkedIn because it came across as a leadership. I still would want to see the leaders of my company.
If they are taking on a challenge to exercise, that’s something we want to talk about in business because health and bringing health to the workplace allows us all to operate better and live longer and thrive and have better meetings because we have less cranky people. You know what? I am just going down the rabbit hole there, but, And mentally process faster and all those things.
Yes. A hundred percent. Okay. So at a post that would just come to my mind would be the same. Hey, listen, I’ve stuck at LinkedIn, just starting out. And just saying that as a company, we aren’t connecting here. We haven’t really connected here authentically with the right businesses that we know that we can help. How do you guys do this year?
And so, by the way, If you let other people look amazing and the comments give you advice, it’s powerful. It’s such a crazy thing. It’s so true. But I think that oftentimes that we forget that a lot of the content should be reading. And we talk about this a lot on Instagram. You and I both love Instagram and even Facebook,
even though Facebook and I have a love, absolute despising loopy relationship with each other for a business standpoint. But we know the rule of thumb is, you know, people like to share things that make them look good just across the board. Shareable content is content. People like to share things to make them look smart and tall and wise and experienced and funny and you know,
all those things. And so that really opening up the LinkedIn communication platform with that same sort of philosophy and understanding that people want to show up and they want to feel good about themselves. And they want to position themselves as leaders. Absolutely freaking brilliant. And I’m so glad I found you. And I will say leaning into the leadership voice. The one thing that when you were mentioning,
they want to share because it makes them look good. It makes them taller. It makes them all these things. It also can make them look like their future selves to be a leader at a business like you were showing up as a leader, wherever, whatever space, it doesn’t matter what your title is. You can be a leader in your space.
And there’s something very shareable about that too. The idea of you are their future self and they share your content because they’re like, wow, I would love to write something like that. I’d love to put something like that, video out into the world and what that person shared was so powerful to me. I’m going to share it. And I think the highest shares,
I think I got close to about 200 shares of a post and that went to half a million views. So it is very, very powerful to be shared on LinkedIn when your content is the one being shared. Basically I got messages saying, all I do is get on LinkedIn and see your content. I love it. I can’t wait to binge your content on LinkedIn and spend more time.
I will be for sure. And so let’s do a quick recap about what we talked about today. Um, beside the fact that we talked about the sweet life company sax on LinkedIn, we will not after this show. And if you’re with me and you want to make sure that you are authentically unintentionally connecting with really great partners and affiliates and your clients,
then you have hung out with us to the end of the show and you have listened to the whole thing. And we should be applying strategies to which are pursing. We talked about the DM strategy, having a set response and a gift that you can send to them. And it’s that response that really is like, Hey, great, thank you so much.
Follow my hashtag, which triggers people to go follow your hashtag actually decide whether or not they want to actually connect with you more than it helps to disqualify, which I love just as much as it helps to qualify ideal connections on LinkedIn and it increases or Ganek reach with your content that you’re directing people back to your hashtag. And then you talked about being a leader on LinkedIn and showing up in three different personalities,
leadership, creator, and challenger. And so my next question to this, even though this could be an entirely different show, but just to wrap this up, how frequently do you recommend companies or individuals should be posting on LinkedIn? Currently it is May, 2020, and this always changes with every social media platform. But right now, how often do you think people should be showing up and posting on this platform?
Oh, so I have, what’s the reason why I have this container LinkedIn business accelerators, because you really do have different patterns for when you are a cold audience, a warm audience, a warm audience, and a hot audience. I consider my audience to be hot. On average, when I’m posting, I hit the 300 to 600 to a thousand likes and comments,
10,000 to a hundred thousand views. So with that audience, it’s a different strategy than a cold audience. So I would start with a cold audience and say, you should be commenting. I know that sounds really interesting, but you should be commenting at least 10, five to 10 comments that are high quality in your ideal circles. Your ideal clients go out into that world into your ideal businesses and conversations you want to be having.
So go out and do five to 10 of those a day. If you can do, if this is the ideal growth strategy, and then you would post two to three times a week. I have some of my clients right at the two posts a week and they’re getting anywhere from 10 to 20,000 views a week. So that’s that strategy. The next is what I call my it’s that warm audience there,
you should be testing and playing around a little bit more. And if you want to ramp up commenting, because again, commenting just changes your entire business. And some businesses drive more traffic by commenting and more business by commenting. Some do really well on video. So it’s almost like playing around in that medium area. That’s where I work with my clients to figure out what’s your sweet spot.
And then I come up with a sustainable strategy. So my sustainable strategy for myself would be different than yours. But mine, for example, is I have a pattern of video document posts, text only post or image posts. And then I do about one post a week because I’d rather have my audience trust that every time I post it’s high quality. And then I go out and I do a ton of comments because I ended up getting more business from engaging with my ideal clients and commenting and showing interest in them.
And then they ended up showing more interest in me. So I ended up having a lot of clients that have never liked and commented on any of my videos or content. I love that. And those connections then go back and happen in the BMS to close deals and land condoms, the same plants. Yeah. I convert business to the direct messages, or I set up my Calendly link to live on my LinkedIn profile,
which is another powerful way to position yourself. It’s right there, but it has an application process to it. And the main reason why is because any human being can see your public profile, if you have your settings on public. So I do want to have you fill out a few basic questions. Do you have a LinkedIn profile or you, do you have a website you want to share with me because some people might be starting from scratch.
I honor that, but I also just want you to have a gate because I can’t have everybody book a spot on my calendar. Also it’d be on the phone calls all day long. And obviously in any case with that too, just free screening appointments where they get to you. That’s yes, that’s incredible. And it’s pretty easy to set up with Calendly and it’s a very powerful part of your that’s why I call it LinkedIn business accelerator,
because I literally want you to get business. I have some clients, I had one client, I just did our second zoom call. One-on-one zoom call. And she said, I have been asked to be on a radio show. Now two podcasts, a live stream. And I’m now being asked to give a keynote presentation at a company online meeting because now everything’s online.
And I was like, that’s only after two weeks. And she was like, I know I just blown away. I love that LinkedIn has come. I think my first LinkedIn training I ever took was an old Lewis house, even though Lewis houses and alas young, it was like Lewis Howes linked, influenced training 2012 or something like that, Which is basically I remember the set us house days,
how to set up your profile. And I love big blue it’s health span anyway. Okay. It’s certainly come a long way. And I, I think as business owners, we’re starving for a platform that we can trust that we can engage in a very real way where we can count on generating high quality. And there is just so much missing from understanding how to do this on LinkedIn.
You don’t have to sort through all the noise on Facebook and even all the noise and other places like YouTube or Google ads or SEO, which is so many different ways, actually like we were saying on a human level. And now it’s always been my preferred way to sell and connect with clients. But now in 2020, we are seeing so much that relationship sell.
And it doesn’t matter if you are a multimillion dollar business or if you are hitting your first six figures, no relationships, relationships sell. And I love, I love your strategy you taught today, and I really appreciate your wisdom and your time, the best today. Do you So welcome. I appreciate yours. I can’t wait to, I can’t wait to bench this And you guys can check out,
go to Judy Fox, J UDI, fox.com. You follow her hashtag Fox rocks yes. On LinkedIn. And we will go ahead and make sure all the links that we discussed today are available for you in the show notes of this episode, which can be found@sweetlifepodcast.com slash one seven eight. Thank you so much. I appreciate your time.<inaudible> Thank you so much for sticking around to the end of this show.
I trust that you gained some very profitable and wise insights from Judy and from our conversation today. And I would love to know what your biggest takeaway is or what the action that you’re going to apply to your businesses. First, based on what you heard on today’s show on LinkedIn, share it with me, connect with me. Who’s over to LinkedIn search April beach and send me a connection.
And I would love to watch what you’re posting and connect with your content even greater. And then of course, make sure you’re following Fox rocks hashtag on LinkedIn, because Judy is certainly the expert. All of the show notes, everything we talked about on today’s episode, if you’re driving and just can’t write it down, all you need to do is remember episode number one 78.
If you go to sweet life podcast.com forward slash one 78, everything they talked about and all the links we mentioned on today’s show will be found in there. I hope you haven’t Awesome. I will talk to you<inaudible

Episode 177: LinkedIn Ad Strategies To Increase B2B Sales – April Beach and AJ Wilcox

AJ Wilcox SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Launch Your Online Programs

Who This Episode is Great For:

New and established businesses who want to learn if LinkedIn is the right platform to reach your ideal audience. 

Summary:

In this episode, we cover who should be running LinkedIn Ads, the 4 types of ads that can be run on Linked, and what you can expect to spend to get results. LinkedIn Ads Expert, AJ Wilcox, founder of B2Linked.com and host of “The LinkedIn Ads Show” dives deep covering what you need to know as a business owner. If you’ve been thinking about advertising on LinkedIn but you’re not sure if it’s the right choice for your business goals, don’t miss this episode. 

Highlights:

  1. Know your ad budget
  2. Decide what kind of ads you should be running
  3. Know where to access your Ads account to get started. 

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hey guys and welcome back. This is part two of a two part LinkedIn ad strategy business podcast training. This is episode number 177 if you missed one 76 and you were wondering about the fundamentals of LinkedIn ads and whether or not you should be even advertising on LinkedIn at all.
Stop this episode. Go back and listen to that one and then catch back up with us here we have J Wilcox in the house with us again and he really is my favorite business person right now because I have been waiting months and months to get him back on the show. I’ve had a ton of questions. And in last week’s and in this week’s episode you also hear a lot of behind the scenes and what’s happening in our company is I own two companies and some of the ad strategies that we’re using and then some of the questions that we have.
So you not only get a business training with these two shows, you’re going to hear a lot of behind the scenes about how we’re using advertising to grow our company as well. So I always try to be transparent with you guys and share with you actual case studies, whether it’s clients or in my own business. And then we have ADA, the expert here dishing exactly step by step how to go about doing this in your own company.
So in this show, it is an extension, like I said of last week, and we’re talking strategic ad strategy for B to B sales. So this show is, especially for those of you guys who have a business that serves other businesses. In this episode we’re covering who should be running ads on LinkedIn, the four types of ads that can be run on LinkedIn and what you should and can expect from your LinkedIn ads results.
At the end of this show, you are going to know a LinkedIn ad budget. You’re going to have a baseline ad budget that if you can’t come to the table with this ad budget, don’t come to the table at all ages really upfront about that. And so we have a come to Jesus moment about how much you have in your marketing. And so you’re not wasting your money or your time.
You’re also going to know what kind of ads you should be running on LinkedIn. And we dive into how to access the ads manager portal in LinkedIn as well as other really cool tracking that you can do even if you aren’t spending any money on LinkedIn ads at all. So we talk about how to install a LinkedIn tracking code on your business website so you can read a massive analytics to make smart choices for your company.
I’m super excited to dive into this part too, and you can find all of the show notes@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash one seven seven alright, let’s go<inaudible>. All right, this is episode number 177 and I am back again with my very good friend at least I think he’s my good friend. That’s, he is my favorite person right now in business. AGA Wilcox,
who is then, I mean we last week dove into some really important foundational information about what companies can and should be leveraging LinkedIn ads. If you didn’t listen to the last week’s episode, you should stop this, pause it and go back and listen to episode number 176 you have a good foundation. You know, last week we talked about who should be advertising on LinkedIn.
You know, what type of companies benefit from that. Aja gave you guys the solid steps to start moving forward. For me, what it did is it got my wheels turning and of course, and then I had a million more questions, so I really appreciate him being back with us on the show today. So Aja, can you reintroduce yourself again to those who’ve not met you before?
Please? Oh sure. I’m so good about bragging about myself. I run a little ad agency. There are only eight of us. I mean we’re very small and nimble of eight people, but we are B to linkedin.com and we specialize only in running LinkedIn ads. We are official LinkedIn partners. We’re actually the only ad agency in the world, but certified partners with LinkedIn.
We run many of their largest accounts as well as many of the smallest and everything in between. We’re just hyper specialized and uh, call us one trick ponies, but we like what we do. I love it, I love it. Hey, you know what, be the one trick pony is a way to build a multimillion dollar business right now. And I love that you do that.
So that’s super cool for you. Now let’s just do like a super quick recap. Last week we talked about three different types of businesses that could benefit from advertising on LinkedIn. Can you rattle those off real quick for us again? Yes. Any sort of high lifetime value lead generation, whether it’s B to B or B to C is number one. Number two is higher education.
So think of like universities, MBA programs, recruiting. And then number three is any sort of white collar recruiting that you’re doing as a company just trying to hire new employees. Okay. My first question to that is totally a selfish question. Yeah. As a company, we love to run ads to this podcast, to the right audience for this podcast,
but when we look at the podcast, the podcast, you know, we don’t even run ads on the podcast intentionally, so I’m not talking about a lifetime value of, you know, I can’t say yes, this listener is going to generate me $15,000 plus in revenue. That’s not the way it works. So for just exposing an audience to content, would you recommend That a company or a podcast like yours or like mine advertises on LinkedIn to increase their listenership?
Or is it, wait and we’re going to dive into money. Is it way too expensive? Oh man, I love this question and I have a hard time with it because LinkedIn ads are really expensive. What we’re paying on average eight to $11 a click, and me personally, I’m a huge fan of podcasts. I’m a huge fan of podcasting, but when I look at it,
you can’t quite calculate what a listener is worth and what sort of lifetime value they will end up being in the future. I have a really hard time investing eight to $11 into that person and I personally don’t even advertise our own podcast on LinkedIn for this reason. I just don’t think the economics would work out, but I do advertise the podcast on Quora ads and I would on Facebook and on Instagram just because the costs are lower.
So the economics just gets in the way of LinkedIn’s amazing targeting sometimes. Darn it. Okay. Well hopefully someday that might change. Okay. So diving in today we are going to talk a little bit more deeply about the four types of platforms that LinkedIn ads appears on within LinkedIn. I’m super excited to do that. Different type of ads you can run.
You were talking about carousel ads and different strategies that businesses can use when they’re presenting their ad content to help our listeners decide which one is the best for them. And then we’re also going to talk about money and how much money you need to spend. I remember two years ago when we talked about there was a threshold that you told me April, if you can’t spend at least this amount of money,
don’t spend any. So I’m super curious how much is the minimum that we’re starting to see and then you know even for businesses, how to get started, where to find the ads manager, if you will, actually how to navigate to that within the platform and how to set up tracking for retargeting. So we have a really big show and thank you for joining us again AIJ and thanks to you guys for tuning in.
If you’re listening to this show, it’s because you have a business that you are curious whether or not you could increase your sales with LinkedIn ads. And so you are certainly in the right place. So AIG, let’s first of all, let’s dive into the four different types of ads that someone can run on LinkedIn. Perfect. So number one that I tell everyone to start with is called sponsored content.
It shows up right in the newsfeed, which is the homepage experience on both desktop and mobile. So this is a great way of getting in front of pretty much all your users. These come in several different flavors. There’s static image, which I think everyone should start with. It’s just a single one image that’s so easy to create and troubleshoot. Then there’s also video,
which we talked about last week. I don’t really love video ads on LinkedIn. They’re pretty expensive and there’s no retargeting yet that comes in the fall of 2020 but there’s also one called carousel. But if you’ve used Facebook ads, you’ll recognize it’s multiple images that someone can scroll through within your ad. And to all of these, you can actually fix something called a lead generation form ad,
and it’s a native form that goes right within your ad itself. So someone can convert on your ad without ever even leaving LinkedIn. It’s really nice and easy all filled in from your profile information pre-filled. So all they have to do is just hit submit and it creates some really high conversion rates. Okay, that’s crazy. So when we’re talking about Facebook ads or Instagram ads or any other ads,
we have to send them to a separate landing page and it actually leads the platform, which is a big stumbling block for many businesses who also build their own websites or they have a very small tech team because then they have to go, Hey, I need you to build a landing page. It needs to have a forum and it needs to connect with this CRM.
So you’re saying that LinkedIn can actually put the lead gen form there within the ad itself? Yes. And Facebook and Instagram can do this too. I think Twitter might have actually even had it before Facebook and YouTube can now do it too, so everyone seems to be jumping on this, this horse, but it’s a great feature and one that LinkedIn probably released four or five years after Facebook.
Wow. But I think what most Facebook advertisers have found is yes, it increases conversion rates, but at the same time it lowers lead quality because the user didn’t have to put forth as much effort to get to know you. And so a lot of times they’ve forgotten that they’ve had, the feedback I’ve heard from Facebook advertisers is we contacted them and they say,
I didn’t fill out a form with you guys. I’ve never even heard of you. Right. We do tend to see the same kind of thing on LinkedIn, but we’ll see. Cost per conversion, cost per lead ends up dropping by 30 to 80% but lead quality might only drop by 10 to 20% so you’re still net positive and it can still be worthwhile doing.
Fascinating. Yeah. We’ve never used that tool or that strategy on Facebook. At all, we always, you know, send them to a landing page where they can see really what it is they’re offering and whether or not they want that. So very interesting talking about the decrease in the quality of lead versus the decrease in the cost per lead. Fascinating.
Okay, so that is the newsfeed. So that’s running ads right there in the main newsfeed of LinkedIn, the one that everybody sees. And in the last show you mentioned that you have to have a LinkedIn company page to do so Yes, that’s correct. Okay. Now what are the other places where ads can appear in LinkedIn? So I think the next most interesting is called sponsored messaging.
That’s the category. And as is inherent to the name it’s messages, right? It actually shows up in your LinkedIn inbox or your InMail. These can show up in two different flavors. There’s one called a message ad and then one that’s called a conversation ad. So the message ad would be like an InMail that someone sends to you. Someone opens it up,
it says words, and you can, if you want to respond to that or not. But the conversation ads is LinkedIn’s newest ad format. And think of it like a chat bot. You can ask someone a question and then based off of how they respond, give them a different offer or a different link or ask them a further question. So these can be fantastic if you,
one of the main uses we’ve found for these is a lot of people want to try to push people towards their booths at trade shows. Obviously when in person events become a thing again, but of course if you’re advertising you need to ask someone first like are you going to be at this show? And so if they say, yes, I’m going to be at this big industry conference,
then you can start pushing them towards the booth. But if they say no, you could say, well, Hey, do you want to join this webinar that we’re putting on next week? So you’re giving people more options and a better chance of relevancy of your offer to them. Okay. Couple of questions. First of all, do you have to be connected with people to run message or conversation ads to them?
Do they have to be a connection? No, they don’t have to be connected to you in anyway. When you pay LinkedIn for these message ads, you don’t pay per click like you do with the rest of their ad formats. With this one, you pay to send it to them so you define the same way that you would have defined any of your other ad targeting by job title and company size and industry and all that,
and then they’re randomized to that audience so you don’t have to be connected as long as you paid them their 20 to 65 cents to send it, they will deliver it to an audience that fits your targeting. Okay, fantastic. Question number two, we’re more of just an observation. An automated chat box within LinkedIn sounds amazing. I mean we use messenger chat and different things within Facebook that are so important and so powerful.
This is so super cool. This sort of automation or relationship building, utilizing AI to build relationships with our leads is absolutely. I totally geek out on that stuff, so I love that. But question number three, as a LinkedIn user, I don’t know that I want to receive chat ads in my chat as a LinkedIn user. That might piss me off if some like rando person sends me a message.
Is there any pushback yet on people that are like, dude, get out of my chat box on LinkedIn Because they could only give responses that you’ve coded in. We don’t get free form responses of people like shutting us out or anything, which is probably a really good thing. Maybe in the future if there’s like a, an open kind of response. But Lincoln’s done a really good job of these.
Yeah. As a member you can only receive one every 45 days. So in case you get one that pisses you off, you’re not going to get pissed off again for at least another month and a half. I guess it keeps that uh, annoyance factor to a minimum. Okay. And can people turn this off like all together? Like never send me an ad through my messenger or it’s just this one in 45 days.
Part of being on the LinkedIn platform. Ooh. I think if you go into privacy settings, I think you can opt out of receiving these altogether, but realize that when someone takes me into kind of like a little bit of a DVS mode, but if someone sends you a really crappy one of these, they’ve essentially destroyed their brand to you and they paid just to deliver it to your inbox no matter what sort of action you take.
So I think one of the worst punishments you could give them is stay opted in so they spend more money on you in the future and just waste cash. But I don’t know. Okay. I think that that is so funny. You are super devious. I am more like, I have no filter. I’d be like, dude, this actually, this sucked total squirrel moment.
You know when people send me things that are just terrible, I just can’t help myself. I actually had a company, this is a complete squirrel moment, but funny here, my listeners are used to this with me. I had a PR company pitch somebody for my podcast last week and it was the worst pitch I’ve ever received. I actually felt so terrible for the person that we’re pitching that I went and I hunted down the person that we’re pitching on Instagram,
sent a screenshot and said, listen, if you are paying this company, don’t cause you are never going to land a podcast guest spot from one woman to another. Your business looks fascinating. Please don’t waste your more money on this company. So I am so I’m totally, the person would be like, your message sucks. Do not send me this message again.
What a waste of know. I would even like connect with them on LinkedIn just to tell them their LinkedIn ad sucked. But sometimes that gets me into trouble cause I have a big mouth and I just can’t. So like you, we want to know this stuff. We want that feedback. And there’s a class of people like me who would never tell,
tell you to your face and there’s a class of people like you who would actually inform them that they were making stupid decisions. This was woman was like, thank you so much. She could have been like you, you know? But she was like, thank you so much for telling me. So I kind of like, I kind of held my breath to wait for,
I didn’t know what her response was going to be. They Kevin, she was like, thank you so much for telling me. Okay, so end of squirrel moment. Back to our four platforms where we can send LinkedIn, we have the sponsored content and the newsfeed. We have the sponsored messaging ads, whether it is the message ad or the conversation ad going through inbox or in mail.
Now the next one you said text ads when we spoke before. Yes, so text ads show up only in the right rail as well as the fourth platform, which we’ll talk about here in a minute as well. But the right rail, it’s important to understand is only available when you’re on a computer. So your mobile device isn’t going to show you this.
So that cuts down on the audience that can see these. But what I want you to understand about text ads is they are very, very risk. They are simultaneously LinkedIn’s lowest cost ad and they also have the lowest engagement rate, which means if you screw this up, it won’t cost you very much because not very many people are going to click on it anyway.
And then when they do click, it doesn’t cost very much cause it’s the cheapest ad format you can pay all the way down to $2 per click from these. So if you’re looking to just dip your toe in the water and you’re okay with getting visitors that are on desktop that they’re not on mobile, this is by far the best way to test into your audience and your offers and check it out without really spending much money at all.
Fascinating. Okay. So maybe start there before you send somebody a conversation. Okay. And then the fourth one is a dynamic ad. What is that? Yes. So dynamic ads, you may have seen them, but you just may not know that what they were, I call them LinkedIn’s creepiest ad format. They actually take your picture, your profile picture and stick it into the app.
So if you’ve ever seen an ad that says like, Hey, April, picture yourself at IBM or at Microsoft and it’s like your picture next to the Microsoft logo or IBM logo. It started out as a job placement kind of ad and then they eventually gave it to us as marketers and said, Hey, however you want to stick someone’s picture in an ad,
go for it. So these used to be really expensive and they just reduced the price earlier this year, so to about a third of where they were. So I actually now started recommending these to people there are slightly cheaper than sponsored content, but again, they’re like text ads. They don’t get clicked on very much cause they’re way over in the right rail.
They’re obviously an ad, but they cost less on a per click basis than your sponsored content will. They’re like maybe six to $8 a click rather than the eight to 11 that you’ll probably pay in sponsored content. Okay. That’s really creepy. But kind of cool. I would definitely, if somebody had my face in the right hand column there, I certainly would stop and be like,
what am I doing down there? So very interesting. And I could see like you were saying possibly like picture yourself here, picture yourself doing this. Certainly for the educational institutions, you know that are trying to get people into their higher education programs like picture yourself with your MBA or whatever. Super cool. All right, so those are our different platforms.
And then last week we hit on the video ads really aren’t converting static image ads are doing better. And then can you just share a little bit about the way carousel ads? Like what is a carousel ad, what is this look like when it’s showing in LinkedIn? Because these are the ads we get great results with carousel ads for our podcast. So we will run like an image and we’ll kind of,
people can scroll through within the ad to different podcast episodes. You know you need this click here and they do really well. So is it, is it set up the same way? Yes, in fact it’s a direct rip off. If I say so, I, without getting in too much trouble, a direct rip off of the way that Facebook pulled it off.
So in your newsfeed you will have one ad with multiple pictures that on mobile you can just thumb through, scroll through or on desktop you can click an arrow and just see a variety of things. So podcast episodes is a great use case for this. Same with like an in person event or a summit, you might put like four pictures or five pictures of some of your best speakers that are going to be speaking.
These are great use cases for it, but be aware, I don’t recommend these very much on LinkedIn because they don’t necessarily perform much better than just a static image and they don’t cost less. So I go, well, okay, I could spend the time of essentially creating four or five little ads inside of one ad, or I could just create four or five separate ads and it would take the same amount of time and cost the same.
So it’s kind of a toss up, but certainly it’s a format that’s available to you. Okay, Good to know. Okay, now let’s talk about money. Oh yes, the important importance. Let’s dive into money break down LinkedIn ad spend, breakdown budget. Let us hear it. Just lay it out there cause I know it. Yeah, It’s not cheap,
right? So I’m going to be a little bit brutal here because I’m so tired of people coming to me and going, Oh man, I spent $300 on LinkedIn ads and they just don’t work. And I go, Oh man, $300 like that’s just a handful of clicks. You can’t learn anything on that small of data. So what I’m hoping that you as listeners are hearing here is if you aren’t going to bring a large enough budget to actually test it out,
I wouldn’t bring any budget at all. I would save up until you do have it. And what that budget is depends on a lot of different factors depending on what you’re trying to learn. So here’s what I’ve found, and this has nothing to do with advertising. This is just a data model. If you have, let’s say around a thousand dollars in spend,
and this is in North America, it costs a lot less to advertise anywhere else in the world. So the numbers can change slightly. But if you’ve spent about a thousand dollars on advertising on LinkedIn, you will generally have statistical significance to your click through rate. So what that means is this type of thing that you can learn is if I’m testing two,
three, four different ads that are pushing on a different motivation here, I can find out statistically what my audience likes and what they react to better. So if your goal is just to find out with significance, do people like what I’m telling them is my motivation, right? Am I pushing on their rate pinpoint within about a thousand dollars in ad spend?
Whether that’s over the course of two days or over six months, you can find that out. Okay. So that is really, I think that’s encouraging because I think the last time we talked two years ago, you said that we were going to need at least 3000 to start understanding how people are responding our ads. Yes. And so I’ll, I’ll take that to the next step here.
If your whole goal is just to find out what ad copy are people going to click on, you can do that with statistical significance with about a thousand dollars but now because of LinkedIn’s costs increasing as they have over the last few years, if your goal is actually to figure out what gets people to convert, which offer, right? You know I have a webinar and I have a free guide,
which one converts best? You can find that out statistically within about $5,000 in ad spend. So if your goal is to find out what is my cost per conversion, what is my conversion rate? Don’t spend less than $5,000 and think you’ve got it. But if your goal is just to find out what people are interested in, then you probably don’t have to spend much more than a thousand dollars just to make sure you’re on the right track.
So full lead generation track, I would say don’t spend less than 5,000 budgeted towards it, but you can test on less and just depending on what you want to learn, a portion of that much money to it. Okay. And that completely makes sense why the ideal business needs to be selling a product with $15,000 or greater in value. Because this is,
I mean significantly, I mean we have, we have clients running Facebook ads for, you know, as little as $5 a day. So it’s huge difference in ad spend. But the reason why I love the LinkedIn platform is because it’s really right now, you know, when we go on Facebook, we go on Instagram, there’s so many other distractions.
So when our clients go on there, you know, they’re seeing grandma’s birthday and they’re seeing your advertisement to your high end mastermind and it’s really hard to get people to focus in on the business aspect of it. Our clients are in this place where they really need to reach their target audience who isn’t distracted, who’s there for a reason. I mean and obviously specifically our clients that are B2B,
that sort of other businesses, which not all of our clients do, but it’s a significant portion of of who we consult in business strategy. And so we’re saying $5,000 really minimum ad budget. But the interesting thing you said here, which does it make any sense to me is there’s no rhyme or reason is the time in which you drip that $5,000 out.
So you telling me that that $5,000 whether I spend it in the first two weeks or spend it in five months is going to give me the same data. Yeah. Because the only difference here is time. So if you’re in this period of super weirdness like we’re in with COBIT right now, time can change a lot of things. If you were trying to run the same ad three months ago and it was dripping into,
now you could tell that would make a big difference. But in general, I mean if you’re talking about just a normal quarter, let’s say the same ad going to the same audience where not a whole lot is changing, seasonality wise, the data is going to be about the same. So I would say as you’re testing things, maybe take the seasonality into mind and analyze it a little bit.
But in general, add performance today and add performance six months from now. It’s all gonna look the same. When you combine it in a spreadsheet and aggregate that data together and you really just want to make sure you have enough data to analyze. So five K in ad spend metrics in an Excel sheet is going to look the same whether it was over six months or a single day.
Okay. I think that’s fascinating and I think that’s encouraging to a lot of our listeners who want to get into LinkedIn ads, but they’re like, man, I don’t have 5,000 to invest in it this month, but I could have 5,000 to invest in it over the next six months. So I love that. All right, so next question. Moving on.
There is a very powerful, scary big brother watching you pixel that Facebook gives advertisers to embed in their website so that we can track people who have visited our website and then re target them with our ads. Does LinkedIn have a similar tracking opportunity? Yes. So LinkedIn has an insight tag that anyone who’s listening, whether you spend a dime on LinkedIn ads or not,
you can go and open up an account and install this thing on your website. And it does three things. So the first is like what you mentioned with Facebook does retargeting. So if you have this on your website, you could eventually go into LinkedIn ads and say, I want to show people ads who visited my website before in the last 90 days or something.
So that’s one use of it, which can be pretty good. Number two is you get these free website analytics from LinkedIn that no one knows about but are free and great. So once that tag is on your website, you can then go look at LinkedIn and see the demographic breakdown. What’s the job titles that people tend to have who visit my website?
What companies by name have visited my website, you know like, Oh my gosh, last 10 or the 10 most important, or what industry or what seniority do people tend to be? So I recommend everyone have this. It’s a great tag to have, even if it does feel a little bit big brother. Okay. That’s like Christmas to me. Okay,
so everybody should go in. Let’s talk about now just wrapping this up here in the show we’ve talked about so much. Where do people go to actually set up this ads manager within the LinkedIn platform itself? What does that look like? Great. If you’re already in LinkedIn, you can click on a in the upper right hand corner under the work menu and you’ll see an icon that says advertise,
but if you want to navigate straight there, the easiest way I’ve found is just type in linkedin.com forward slash ads ads and that’ll get you there. You click on the create button at the top and it’ll walk you through the whole process of creating your account if you don’t already have one. Okay. Love that. And then again, another selfish question for me and yeah,
forgive me to my listeners, cause I know this doesn’t apply to many you, but I own two companies and so I have two LinkedIn business company pages and completely separate websites as well. Is it possible to create two separate LinkedIn business ad manager accounts because the audiences are totally separate within LinkedIn? Or do I actually have to create two completely different LinkedIn personal accounts?
Ooh, great question. Yes. One person can be connected to as far as I can tell, an infinite number of ad accounts and you can create as many as you want. So if I were you under your same profile login, I would go and create two separate ad accounts, one for each company and then just run them separately. Love it.
Okay. That makes my life so much easier. It’s not quite as easy. It should be quite as easy, but it’s not quite as easy on the tech side of it for me to figure that out. So I always have to give that to to other people that figure out for me. So I love that. That actually sounds really easy. Okay,
so let’s kind of recap again. Today was part two of our two part training here with the one and only AIJ Wilcox, the LinkedIn ads King himself who is the founder of be two linked.com. You guys should totally go check him out and follow him on LinkedIn. Um, we talked about before different places where your LinkedIn ads can appear, right? So sponsored content messaging,
content, text ads and dynamic ads. You also covered, you know, different type of ads to run whether video ads or carousel ads or static image ads. And then we also talked about the lead gen forums. Super cool. So much information. I learned so much on today’s show and I really appreciate that. And we talked about money, talks about being honest about the budget.
This is not one of those things you can go into passively. If you’re a life coach or you teach yoga classes, you’re not going to benefit from what I’m hearing you say AIG right now on LinkedIn, unless you have a really big ad budget and in less the value of what you’re selling has a lifetime of being greater than $15,000 from a client, from a lead on LinkedIn.
So we talked about that and you guided us through how to find the ads manager and how to set up your LinkedIn insight tags, which everybody, regardless of whether or not you are going to be advertising on LinkedIn now or in the future, should go and create this LinkedIn ads account and get this insight tag so that you can start getting these crazy awesome analytics cause this is what we really want.
And you know, I know a lot of businesses don’t use analytics as much as they should. They don’t look at who’s going to their website, who’s searching this, you know, what are the most common search terms for what I sell in my geographic area. These are things that as business owners, if we have these tools available to us, especially for free,
it absolutely cuts months and thousands and thousands of dollars off of our learning curve of guessing, putting a hypothesis out there and wondering if it’ll work. And I love that LinkedIn offers this tool and I appreciate you so much for just jamming on all this and walking me through this strategy and always just having the best guidance and being super honest with our audience about who this is for and who this isn’t for.
So just totally appreciate you. Thank you. I will. Thanks for letting me share. This is the highlight of my week is getting to just freak out about LinkedIn ads. So thanks for giving me the opportunity. Oh, you’re the best. We totally appreciate it. Okay, so for people to find you again, what is your podcast and exactly,
you know, how can they connect with you the most as far as if they want to get on the phone with you and just say yes, agent, I’m ready to get started on this. Can you help? Sure. So the LinkedIn ads show search for that in whatever podcast player you’re using. I should be in all of them. We have about under 20 episodes so far,
but it’s growing and we go real deep on LinkedIn ads. So this is right up your alley. Go dive in there. And then, uh, if you want to chat, go to BTU, linkedin.com our website. Fill out the form on any of those pages. They don’t go to a sales rep, they just go directly to my inbox, so feel free to reach out and I’d love to chat with you.
Awesome. Thank you so much. And this is sweet life podcast number 177 so for all the show notes, if you’re on the go, you couldn’t take notes, you want to go back to all these links. We’re going to make sure we put them nice and organized for you inside the show notes on our website so you guys can cruise over to sweet life,
podcast.com/one seven seven and hyper connect to AAJ from there. Thanks so much JJ. I really appreciate you absolutely party on Z.
 

Episode 176: LinkedIn Ads: How To Get Started – April Beach and AJ Wilcox

AJ Wilcox SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grow Your Business Online

Who This Episode is Great For:

New and established businesses who want to learn if LinkedIn is the right platform to reach your ideal audience. 

Summary:

You’ve been thinking about advertising on LinkedIn but you’re not sure where to start, or if it’s a wise choice for your business. LinkedIn is a powerful ad platform, but it’s unlike others and you need to be sure you’re spending your marketing money for the ROI you expect. 
 
In this episode my friend and LinkedIn Ads Expert, AJ Wilcox, founder of B2Linked.com covers what types of companies benefit from LinkedIn Ads, the 3 components of successful ad strategies and basic steps to get started. You’ll leave knowing if LinkedIn is the right platform for your business and what types of ads you can start running now.

Highlights:

  1. Decide if your company should be advertising on LinkedIn
  2. Learn how LinkedIn ads work
  3. Know the 3 components of a profitable LinkedIn Ad strategy 

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hey Darren, welcome back to the Sweetlife entrepreneur in business podcast. This is episode number 176 and I’m April leech if we don’t know each other yet. I’m a business development strategist for companies who are looking to launch and scale online and develop online programs,
offers and services to increase your profit and everything we talk about on the show is giving you tools and strategies that you can take to the bank is a matter of fact. If this is your first time here, you will soon know that the business trainings we deliver here on this podcast, a lot of coaches and consulting firms charge thousands of dollars for, so it’s all for you.
It’s our mission in order to grow small businesses and it’s our commitment to do this week after week. So thank you for joining us today on the show is part one of a two part series and I’ve invited my friend AIJ Wilcox to come back and chat with us on this show. We’re talking to those of you guys who have businesses and you want to learn if LinkedIn is a right platform to reach your ideal audience.
So you might’ve been thinking about advertising on LinkedIn, but you’re not sure where to start or if that’s even the right platform for you to advertise in. You know LinkedIn is a really powerful ad platform, but what you’ll learn in this episode is there a lot of businesses that are showing up and putting money into LinkedIn that it’s not really the right fit for you.
And then there are other companies who are showing up in you don’t have the ad strategy or you might’ve been actually spending your money incorrectly on the wrong type of ads. So this is part one of a two part series where Aja and I are diving into, you know who should be on LinkedIn. And at the end of this episode you are going to decide if your company should be advertising on LinkedIn.
You’re going to know how LinkedIn ads work and you’re going to know the three components have a profitable LinkedIn ads strategy. So without further ado, let’s go ahead and bring AGA onto the show and everything we’re talking about can be found@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash one seven six All right, here we go, you guys. This is episode number 176 and I am so excited because my friend AIJ Wilcox is here with me now.
AAJ has been a guest on this show. It’s been about two years. I hunted him down because I wanted to know more about LinkedIn ads, but the honest truth is I have done nothing with the strategies he me because our business, our ad dollar was focused on Facebook and Instagram. But the truth of the matter is is you know we’re a business to business company and we need to be advertising on LinkedIn.
And so I had to hunt him down again and say, Hey, listen my friend, I need to know where to get started again. And I have so many clients that I believe need to be putting their marketing money into LinkedIn ads and we don’t even know where to start. So who do we call our Ghostbusters friend J Wilcox. So Aja, thank you so much for being back on the show.
Um, reintroduce yourself to our audience so they know who you are. Sure thing. April, I’m excited to be back. Name as a, you know, a J Wilcox. I run an ad agency called B to linked.com and we are a very small, there’s only eight of us, but we’re an agency that specializes only in advertising on LinkedIn. So we go crazy deep.
Everything from teaching people how to run their own accounts, consulting, training, all the way to managing the accounts or are you to get your best performance from the buck. Because as we know from the last episode, LinkedIn ads are incredibly expensive. And so any mistake you make or any learning curve you go through, it has to be financial consequences we’ll say.
So working with a team who understands what works and what doesn’t and kind of cut through all that has been really good for our clients. So that’s what we do. And uh, I think we’ve grown a little bit since we talked last. I think when we talked before we only had two people on the team. I think you have to, yeah,
I’ve seen you all over the place. I think when we talked your kids were little in the background, which they’re probably still a little way littler than mine and you are just like, yes. You know, we’re getting started with this. And even when we talked though, even with just two of you, you were telling me how your agency was handling huge ad accounts for people on LinkedIn with like crazy results.
So let’s kind of start there with just answering the question. Who right now should be advertising on LinkedIn? Yeah. So I think there are three categories of companies that I think are a really good fit. So the first is if you’re doing lead generation of any kind with a high lifetime value, and so in my mind, that’s when you close a customer.
If they’re going to be worth $15,000 or more to you, then it’s pretty much a no brainer. So that’s B2B or even there’s some B to C lead gen that can get in that arena. But most of what we do is B to B. The next is higher education. Things like MBA programs who are recruiting the educational targeting that LinkedIn gives us is really good for those kinds of folks.
And then finally, as you’d imagine with LinkedIn recruiting works really well, just white collar hiring someone. So if you’re looking for a new sales manager, you can target people who already have the title of sales manager in your area and ask them if they’d be interested in applying it if you look interesting to them. And those are the three categories that make a lot of sense on LinkedIn.
Okay. So now that you’ve answered that, I feel like I need to take us a little bit of a step backwards. Is LinkedIn still this place where it’s ideal to use this platform to find a job more of like an online resume platform? Or are we finally starting to see a change in LinkedIn to become more of a social platform? You know,
why are people on LinkedIn? Yeah. If you would’ve asked me before 2014 I would have told you, yep, it’s a job searching platform, but since then, you know, you log in and there’s a newsfeed and then for entrepreneurs like you and me, we love the organic newsfeed because it’s so easy for our content to go viral. We’re able to reach people in the right mindset in ways that you just never could on Facebook or Instagram where competition’s higher.
Right. So yeah, it’s a fantastic platform for communicating right now. Not everyone has adopted and figured that out, but I think that is good for those of us who are ahead of the curve. Yeah, for sure. And I know that’s something we’re diving into more as a company and that’s a whole nother show is chatting about that. So let’s kind of get back to B to B,
diving into client or I should say business type number one. So high value ROI. And so that brings us back to the next question of how do you even get started with LinkedIn ads? Is this something that if somebody says, Hey listen, I have a program or I have a product that I want to sell to this company, this corporation, and I want this corporation to be a longterm client of mine.
Is this the ideal type of business that should be diving into LinkedIn? Yeah. So when you start thinking about like even before you decide which platform you want to go after, I keep an acronym in my mind called ammo ammo. And it’s the three things you need for any sort of social promotion. So the first is a is audience, the M is your message and the O is your offer.
So LinkedIn is so good at targeting the right audience if it’s in B2B specifically because we can target people by all kinds of great things, job titles, seniority, what groups, they’re members of skills, they have company size industry. All of that. So you have that in mind. If you know LinkedIn is a good fit for your audience, then you move on to the acronym letter at the end.
Oh, it’s the offering. We know if you put an ad up that just says, click here to talk to our sales rep, or click here for a demo or click here to buy something. You’re not giving anyone any reason to actually interact with your ad. No one will click. Or if they do, it’ll cost a lot per click. So you gotta have something that’s actually media and interesting so that they’ll have a reason to interact with you.
And then once you know what that, Oh, your offer is the message of what is actually being shown to the customer is really easy to figure out. You’re picking a couple lines of and an image, and once you have all three of those things, it’s really easy to go into the LinkedIn ads platform and build your first campaign and ads, but plan out your ammo beforehand.
Got it. I love that acronym. All right. And so when we’re talking about actually what type of ads do well on LinkedIn, we know for example, on Facebook it’s video, everybody wants video. Is LinkedIn the same? I mean, can we get the same click through rate or whatever LinkedIn calls it for a static image as we could with running a video ad?
Can we run video ads on LinkedIn? Yes. So LinkedIn does have video ads, but I don’t recommend them yet. They’re not quite the silver bullet on LinkedIn like they are on Facebook. And I think it’s mainly a pricing concern. On Facebook, you’ll pay one to 2 cents per person who watches at least three seconds of a video on LinkedIn, it’s 10 to 20 times that.
So we oftentimes see 10 15 20 cents per view, which is just quite frankly more than I think people should be paying. So if you have great video creative and you’ve tested on other platforms, absolutely bring it over to LinkedIn and test it. But I would say for your very first dipping your toe in the water of LinkedIn, start with a static image.
Make it as simple as possible. So that you can read the results. If video ad is kind of hard to troubleshoot, you don’t know if it was your ad copy that didn’t perform or the video or a combination of the two. But if it’s just a static image, you know, it was either your text or your image and if there’s a problem you can fix it very quickly and try it again.
Okay. Thank you for that. That is so interesting. Yeah, we’re getting a, you know, even most recently you and I recording this podcast here real time, it’s not prerecorded. More meeting. This one’s going to drop just in about nine days. So real time. As we’re speaking right now, our video ads on Facebook are at 1 cent.
I mean, they’ve never been cheaper, but you’re right, like the static image ads, you know, we’re seeing, you know, conversions, $2 $3 a conversion. And so we stopped doing those because I just think that’s ridiculous to pay. So good to know that that is a flip because I think for people that are getting started with ads, especially companies that are doing their own ads,
when we throw into them all these other techie things, they have to figure out like you got to do a dynamic video and maybe it should have some music in it and we need to put some text over the video. It just becomes so daunting. I think that entrepreneurs are so busy, they’re like, I’m out. I’m just not even doing that.
And those are the things that we’re telling them and they have to do on other ad platforms. So I love that LinkedIn isn’t that way yet. It’s much easier to get them started. So a question for you now about the static image. Does LinkedIn have rules about the images like Facebook does? For example, there can’t be so much text over an image.
Do people seem to be responding more to just an actual picture or is it a picture with texting? Graphics? Yes and no. So the issue here is that I like probably the rest of you absolutely hate the 20% rule. On Facebook. Yeah, the restriction that, Oh, you put too much text in your image. So Facebook’s not going to show it.
LinkedIn doesn’t have that. But what we find is time and time again in all of our testing is the more text we put in an image that we’re set performs. So I like the freedom that LinkedIn gives you. They’re not going to penalize you for it because we have found some instances where text on the image data improve performance. So definitely test. But I would say keep it in mind that the whole purpose of your image is just to get people to stop scrolling so that they will read your ad copy.
So don’t try to convert someone from the image, make sure the image is bright and colorful and contrasting so that they’ll stop and actually read your thoughtful ad copy that will convert. Okay. Thank you for that. Alright, so now let’s kind of switch back a little bit to my original questions about targeting. So many of our clients, many of our customers,
they have programs that they want to sell. They’re either coaches or service providers. Quite a few of them have corporate programs and so they’re trying to reach the internal champion of that. The one that says, Oh my gosh, look at this. That just came through from the Sweetlife company or whatever. I want to take this to my decision maker. And so one of the problems is finding that internal champion.
So when we’re talking about how to target ads on LinkedIn, like who to run the ads to, you mentioned we can break up ads by title and educational level. Talk to us about really how hyper-focused we can get with direct targeting to specific people to find either the champion or the decision maker that initiated the interest in a company or a program. Oh,
I love this question. So here’s what we can do. If you know the individual title or role that you’re trying to go after, then you can build a campaign targeting just people of that title and role in that company size, in that type of industry. And you can go all the way down to the minimum audience size of 300 so I like to use the example because it’s so easy to picture.
If you want to target just the CEOs of the fortune 500 you can do that. You can target job title of CEO at this list of 500 companies and you can hit them all the way down to an audience size of just 300 so I like to kind of break an audience up into two different levels. There’s the person who’s actually feeling the pain. Then you have maybe the influence,
maybe not the influencers, maybe the actual signers, the decision makers, and depending on what stage of that process you’re trying hit, you could target one or the other or both at the same time. So if I’m going after marketers, for instance, because I am a marketer, I think like this, if I’m selling a an advertising tool, I might show an ad to the individual contributor level,
the person who’s actually pulling the buttons and turning the switches. I guess you can’t really turn a switch, but you get the idea. Yeah, I can target them with an ad about, Hey, wouldn’t this make your life easier if you could do this faster and more accurately? And then I might target more of like the manager and above or director and above maybe just the VP level with messages like save money by your employees,
being more, uh, more efficient at building ads quicker. And you have that freedom because you can break them up into two different camps or five different camps if you want and show them all different creative messaging. Yeah, so smart. Okay, next question. Can we geotarget ads? So if I only want to run ads here in Colorado, can I do that on LinkedIn?
Yes, you can. So up until about three months ago, LinkedIn’s GOs were really limited. They were only like Metro areas. So for instance, in Colorado you might have like Denver Metro and you’re like, Oh, well what about just like a specific zip code? You couldn’t do it. But since then LinkedIn has integrated their geo targeting with the being Microsoft data.
Very cool. Yes. If you’ve ever used Bing ads, it’s a great platform. Rivals, Google ads. And about every way you can think of. And it’s half the cost. So they’ve merged those data sets. So now you as a marketer, you can target all the way down to an individual city level. We’re not zip code, we’re not radius yet like you can do on Facebook and Google,
but it’s a lot more specific. Okay, I have a million questions for you. Ha. You’re my favorite. My favorite person right now. Okay. So when we’re actually for those people that are listening, we’re actually going to break this podcast episode into two because we know you guys are short on time and so we’re going to have to really short,
hard-hitting full of information episodes for you. So when you’re listening to now 176 and next week’s episode one 77 and next week’s episode, I want to talk about ad spend budget strategy. Wrapping up here, we’ve talked about a lot of things. So we, you have mentioned the three types of businesses that are really great candidates to advertise on LinkedIn. The first one you said B2B,
so lead generation for high lifetime value. So if what they’re selling is over 15,000 lifetime or greater, you also said higher education MBA. So let’s kind of jam on that for a little bit. What type of businesses would fall into that category? The higher education? Yeah. Are you actually talking about institutions advertising or people who want to reach individuals connected institutions?
I just don’t know that I’m understanding that correctly. Oh, I gotcha. Yeah. At the institution itself. So you imagine like a local university to you who they have an MBA program that they’d like to fill up with students. LinkedIn would let you target and obviously customize for your own organization, but you can say, I want to target anyone who has a bachelor’s but doesn’t yet have a master’s or PhD who got their degree in English or journalism and has at least five years of experience in the workforce.
Oh, wow. Yeah, I can see how powerful that, that would be. A hundred percent. Okay. And then, um, along those same lines, there are many companies that are educational platforms. So, you know, we talk about the knowledge commerce industry. You and I were both in that industry. You know, sharing knowledge, teaching individuals how to up their game,
increase their skills. So could this also apply to platforms, online platforms and online companies that are teaching skills to individuals who also then need to target or want to target people who are already at a certain educational level who might not be, you know, an official institution. Oh, for sure. Yeah. And the targeting on LinkedIn is so great for so many people.
What it usually comes down to though is the cost. Yeah. Because last time we talked, I think the average cost per click on LinkedIn was six to $9. It’s now eight to 11 because you know, increased competition over time. Interesting. Okay. So it’s going up. Okay. Yeah. And I want to talk about that more in the next show too.
Okay. So, um, and then the third person obviously is recruiting, hiring. That’s an easy no brainer. So those are the three types of businesses that are really ideal to advertise on LinkedIn. We dove into your acronym, your audience message, offer your ammo acronym and making sure that as a business you have all of those nailed down before you start your ad campaign.
You talked about the importance of having like simple ads, not these fancy video ads, simple ads with images that are thumb stopping images with. Great copy. Before we kind of wrap up here, because I literally, I have so many questions for your age and I just appreciate you so much, so much being on the show and just allowing me to ask my completely uneducated LinkedIn advertising questions to you and I know there are so many people like me that just want to know more and so I’m thrilled about this before somebody starts even thinking about advertising on LinkedIn.
And just to kind of wrap up this first episode, can you just explain to us what they really need to have set up in place as far as a profile or a company page? You know what I mean? I mean, so I know we have a, we just actually started our Sweetlife company page. I’ve had my LinkedIn personal profile for, I don’t even know as long as I could have had it,
you know, years over a decade for sure. What do you need to have in place before you can even dive into this or what do you recommend? Yes, excellent question. So there are four different ad formats that you can use on LinkedIn. The main ad format that shows up in the newsfeed, that’s the one that I recommend everyone start with.
That’s the only one that requires a company page to be associated with it. The rest, you can use any of them, not in your newsfeed types of ads without a page. But what’s so interesting to me is you don’t have to make sure your pages rockstar for your ads to perform well. The only things that people see from your company page in your ad are the company name,
the logo, and the number of followers. So as long as your number of followers is not like an embarrassingly low number like ours, I’m looking at mine right now, it has 732 followers and I might go, okay, I might try to get that up before I really start hitting for the fences or anything, but as long as you’re not embarrassed by that number,
you can show ads and the vast majority of people won’t ever come to your page to check out anything else you’ve shared or really anything else about your company. They’ll do what your ad is asking them to do, which is come to my landing page and fill out my form. So don’t sweat too much over what is on your company page. Just fill it out with the basics and make sure it doesn’t look embarrassing to you and then then your ads will perform as you create the ads.
Got it. Okay, so that means I shouldn’t be running ads probably yet from my company page because I think we have three followers. Yeah, your 700 is embarrassing them by three. Well, the nice thing is you can cheat a little bit because LinkedIn released about six months ago. The ability to invite your connections so every day you can go in and invite up to,
I think it’s 25 of your connections to follow your company page every day. Go in, invite 25 people that you know are great for your target audience or just good friends. Invite them and start padding that number over time and that way you wouldn’t be embarrassed about. That’s so funny. My assistant Kelly, she’s my assistant Kelly there. Let’s just add that to your daily job tests every day.
She’s literally rolling her eyes right now while she listens to this show. She’s like, great, thanks April, but what? What I’m hearing is you don’t have to have a business page. You can still run LinkedIn ads without having a company page set up. Yup, yup. You can still run message ads which go to their inbox and on the desktop you can run both ad formats that are just hanging out over in the right rail.
One’s called text ads and one’s called dynamic ads, but you probably will want a page four, the main ad format just because it’s the best ad format for most people, but you could theoretically without, Okay. Yeah, for sure. I want to type for many more questions about that in the next show. And then just the profile in general, like a general everybody’s general LinkedIn profile.
You said few people actually come to either check out the company or the actual profile of the person running the ad, so it doesn’t seem like we have to have this rockstar profile in place either. So somebody who’s relatively new to LinkedIn or who’s really never taken the time to grow their LinkedIn connection could from what you’re saying is is correct. Do real well with ads,
just basically because that doesn’t seem to be a deciding factor on how the ads convert. Yes, and in addition to that, you can’t actually even link to the profile of the person creating the ads. So quite often we’ll have a client who they personally don’t have a profile and so to work together they set one up and it’s bare bones, I mean no picture,
barely their name, but we can still run ads for them because their company page is okay or even run some of those other ad formats that don’t require the page. So yeah, don’t let that stuff stop you from being able to run ads. Awesome. Thank you so much AIJ for being here. This is sweet life business podcast, episode number 176 all of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com
forward slash one 76 and for you guys to connect with AIG AIG, tell people where they can find you if they already know they want to dive into this. They don’t want to deal with figuring this out on their own as much information as we’re giving them here. It isn’t like having you hold their hand. Where can everybody find you? Awesome. Well,
because you are all listening to a podcast right now. I’m excited to announce. I actually just launched my own podcast about four months ago, so if you’re interested in going super deep into LinkedIn ads, just searching whatever podcast player you’re listening to right now, the LinkedIn ads show, and you’ll see a a bright chubby ginger point now yet or something. That’s how you’ll know it’s may and of course I’m really easy to find.
If you go to<inaudible> dot com our business website, if you fill out the form on any of those pages, you don’t go to a sales rep and you don’t get put into our newsletter. It just goes directly to my inbox and I’m not a sales guy, so feel free to reach out and I’m happy to email back and forth. Dude, you’re awesome.
Thank you so much, JJ. All right, you guys, thanks for listening. Screenshot this episode. If it helped you and uploaded to LinkedIn tag Aja, tag me in it. Let us know what you took away from this, what you benefited the most are white, you know what you learned. We really appreciate your feedback and sharing this show,
and we will talk to you again next week. Thanks for being here

Episode 173: Easy Steps To Create Videos For Your Course, Webinar or Training

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join THE SHIFT 2020: 
  1. Text “shift” to the number 31996
  2. Send us a DM here to get more info
  3. Or Email april@sweetlifeco.com to learn more
  4. Join our free Facebook Community www.sweetlifecommunity.com

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for those struggling with how to create instructional videos to share, including simple steps like where to record and what should you share? 
 
Especially for businesses or entrepreneurs going from offline to online, and launching your first online course or webinar 

Summary:

This podcast teaches you how to create videos, step by step,  for your online course, content to drip to your membership website, or to teach on live webinars or live streams. With a tech guide and checklist to get your videos up fast.
 
You want to create videos to share with your clients, but when you sit down to actually start… you’re lost on the steps. If technology seems hard, you’re not alone. In a world of online everything, the overabundance of options doesn’t help. In fact,  too many choices can stall your business completely. 

Highlights:

  1. Choose between the 3 types of content you want to share
  2. Present your content in the right way for your audience
  3. Gives you the exact steps to record and process your videos fast

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Welcome to the beach house on a busy Monday, the night here in Boulder, Colorado as a record, this episode for you number one 73 real time because all of our podcast episodes have been recorded week by week for you to make sure we’re giving you the exact content you need in this very strange, ever-changing business economy. Welcome to the show.
I’m April beach and I am joined by my three teenage boys and my husband on the other side of the wall having dinner. The windows to my office are open because it is a gorgeous Colorado evening and so I hope that you can bear with me if there’s a little bit of background noise and I totally know that you understand right now. Today’s show is all about helping you create videos so that you can launch your online content faster. Now, the last couple of episodes we’ve been pouring into you on how to update and change your messaging,
how to make sure your mindset is right so you keep the cash flowing into your business. And today we’re really honing into how to create video content so you can release online offers that keep your clients pain. So this particular episode is perfect for those of you who are established business owners or you’re brand new, you’re literally just launching a brand new company. You know, there’s no time better than the present. The only place you can go is up from here. And so I encourage you to dive in and you’re struggling with actually how to create your instructional videos,
including simple steps like where to record them, where to share them, and actually what type of content that you want to share. So this particular episode is going to be give you the three types of content that you can choose from to share. You at the end of this episode are gonna know exactly how you want to present this content and you’re going to have the exact steps to record and process your videos really fast. So all of the show notes and everything we’re talking about, all of the resources,
the technical resources can be found on our podcast website by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com board slash one 73 so let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.<inaudible>. Okay. As we dive in, the first thing you need to decide is what type of content are you creating? So there’s three common types of video content that you would create for an online course or for a webinar. The first one is actual video only, so that’s your face on the camera, just talking to people about what it is, just like you’re teaching or speaking on stage,
but it’s actually virtual. And so that is content type number one content type two is actually creating a PowerPoint presentation and a recording of voiceover to your PowerPoint presentation and talking them through the instruction. And then the third type of content that you can choose to share is actually a combination. This could be a little bit of your face on the video and then you can flash over to maybe a white board or something interactive that you want to share. Possibly you can show some photographs or you could show your PowerPoint presentation,
so the very first step is actually choosing what type of content is best for you to share and what type of content your audience wants. Again, video only with your pretty face right there, chatting with them. Number two, PowerPoint with your voiceover or number three, a combination. Okay. Now let’s talk about the reality and the pros and cons of each. First of all, if you’re going to record video only with just your face talking almost on the spot, then you have to be really good at on the spot.
You have to be really good at what you do. This is usually an ideal delivery. For those of you who are already experts in your field, you’re already comfortable teaching online. Maybe you’ve spoken on stages before and you’re basically really good at on the fly. You’re also funny,
a little entertaining and you aren’t terrible at going off on tangents, but you utilize these little kind of squirrel moments to keep your audience engaged.
That is a perfect scenario for you to actually speak on the camera. You need to be able to keep people engaged just when you’re talking to them,
especially when they can’t talk back cause we’re talking about creating prerecorded content. All right, so now let’s talk about the pros and cons of option number two.
This is creating a PowerPoint presentation, so PowerPoint presentations are really amazing if you have a lot of data,
if you have a lot of step-by-step or if you have a lot of graphs or content that you want people to share,
PowerPoints are a great way to deliver a lot of structured information that people that are visual learners actually take action on better.
The downfall of a PowerPoint presentation rather than just coming out and recording your video training is that it takes at least three times longer to create that because you actually have to outline the structure of your PowerPoint slides.
You have to design the slides and you have to then take the time to record over them so it is going to take you longer,
but it’s a great option for those of you that aren’t super comfortable on camera yet and you want the actual content to help guide you through your teaching so that you stay on track and you also want to help those in your audience that are visual learners and really love seeing that you know step by step.
Now we’re going to give you tons of tech quick start guides at the end of this and in the show notes,
but I’m going to tell you right now the fastest way to create amazing PowerPoint slides is through Canva. You know,
we’ve gone through Microsoft PowerPoint presentation, we’ve done keynote, we’ve been around the block on all of those and we are really pleased at recommending that people use Canva now because you can actually create canvas slides that are already done for you.
It just plug in your content. They look amazing. All right, they look absolutely amazing and you can actually present them as a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation now.
So that’s my quick little tech nugget in here, but I’ll be also giving you all of the tech tips at the end of this episode in our show notes.
And then the pros and cons of the third option. Remember that third option was kind of a combination.
This is actually my favorite way for businesses to present content. Number one. It gives them an opportunity to really see you face to face authentically.
So this is one where we combine a little bit of you face to face, a little bit of a white board strategy session and a little bit of an example,
whether you’re showing a case study or a photograph online and using it as an example for your participants. For the people that you’re teaching.
It’s a great way to keep people engaged, to keep the content interactive and to continue to meet the needs of your students with all varieties of learning abilities,
whether it’s audio or whether it’s visual or whether people want to have that interactive content. It might take you a little bit longer to create this because of the variety,
but it’s usually the GoTo way for new businesses that are trying to make an impact, trying to connect with your audience more authentically,
trying to give amazing content and teach amazing content that people can immediately take action on. So those are just a few of the pros and cons about that.
Now let’s go ahead based on whichever one you chose. Again, video only PowerPoint presentation or a combination.
Let’s go ahead and I want to actually give you the steps to create your videos and get them online.
This might seem super elementary to a lot of people, but you would be blown away by the number of emails and the number of people that actually reach out to me and say,
okay bro, I’m ready, but how do I actually record the video? Where do I do it?
Well, you know, what does this look like? Give me the steps. And so that’s what we’re doing on today’s show.
Okay? So step number one is choose how you will deliver your content. So you’re going to make that choice between video only PowerPoint or a combination.
And then what we’re diving into here is we’re talking about prerecorded content. You also can of course deliver this on live streams.
But I want to dive in really specifically to those of you who are creating courses or creating a membership community.
So step number two means that you will actually create any sort of downloads a go along with it. You’re going to create any sort of slides,
graphics, any photography that you want to share with it. So you’re going to gather all your materials,
you’re going to gather your materials, you’re going to gather your content, and then step number three is you actually lay out,
you outline your teaching. We want to make sure that you have a very clear outline of every single one of your videos so that at the beginning of your video,
it’s super clear that people know what they can expect at the end. Here’s an example of this. It’s not just video.
This podcast. In the beginning of this podcast, I said we’re going to talk about the three different types of content that you can create so you can choose and we’re going to go ahead and give you the step by step to actually record your videos.
You need to be able to say that at the beginning of every single one of your videos so that people know whether or not they want to stay tuned.
That’s a really important key. The way you do that is by outlining your content to make sure you’re delivering predictable transformational results within every single video that you create.
That means people can predict the end result that they will achieve from watching your video. So take the time to actually outline your content and make sure that you are taking people from a start to finish route.
And then step number three after you’ve decided how you’re presenting your material, after you’ve created any slides or you’ve created any worksheets,
is actually going in, setting up the room where you will create the video. Now, depending on your tech setup,
there are a few different ways you can do this. And so I’m going to give you all of them here on this podcast that you are going to need to look at your technical setup and see which one’s best for you.
Number one, if you are recording just simple video, just use your iPhone or your iPad to record your video.
Your iPhone especially now records amazing videos. You don’t need to invest in huge expensive video camera. You can do it really well right now on one of the most recent cellular phones.
Now you do want to have a mic and so you either want to invest in a cordless wireless Mike,
or you can invest in a wired mic with a really long wire so you can clip it to your shirt because your audio and making sure that you are clear is really important.
As a matter of fact, data shows that your audio is more important to viewers than your lighting. So if we had to pick audio or lighting,
if you have to go with one of them first, we’re going to pick audio cause if your audio is crappy,
but you look really great, nobody’s listening to a word that you’re going to say. They’re just thinking about the fact that they can’t hear you.
All right, so we want to make sure your audio is really excellent. So step number one is just creating the video on your phone.
That’s option number one. Option number two is actually creating a zoom account. Whether you use that already or not for your business,
creating a zoom meeting. There’s two different types of zoom accounts. You can have zoom webinar and zoom meeting.
You just need a zoom meeting account and setting up a meeting, recording it all by yourself. You don’t even have to invite anybody else there.
If you have slides, you can share your slides, you can record your audio, you can connect an external microphone so you sound great.
As a matter of fact, zoom has so many different advanced tools now that you can use. You can even improve your parents by the zoom settings,
so actually create your videos by talking to yourself, by teaching them all by yourself in zoom and sharing your screen,
sharing what other content you might want to bring in depending on what is your teaching and how you’ve chosen to deliver your materials.
Option number three is actually hosting your zoom training live, bringing people in there, teaching the training to a group of people,
recording that, and then downloading and using that recording to share with other people in the future. This is how we create live content and we turn it into what’s called evergreen content content that you can sell again and again and again.
So zoom is a really amazing way. You don’t have to have this huge camera setup, just record right there and zoom and it will share a little picture of your face and it will share your screen and what it is that you’re looking at.
It’s a really great way to get started. Other tools that you can use to do this, R E cam live,
we love e-comm live e-com live is a more advanced streaming tool, but ECAN live lets you change the background.
You can set an entire scene, you can share your desktop and there’s so many more things that you could do with Ecamm live.
You can either record it directly by yourself and save that recording to turn into your coarser material. Or you can actually live stream into your Facebook community,
live stream onto YouTube and many other places and still capture the recording to use that recording inside your course.
So those are three very clear how to record steps. Let me go ahead and review them for you again.
Okay. This is for those of you guys that are just getting started to create video content and you are stumped.
So you’ve already chosen what type of content that you want to record, whether it’s a straight video or whether it’s a sharing,
a dashboard or sharing slideshows or a combination. And here are a recap of the steps to actually get that video recorded.
So first things first, choose how you’ll deliver the actual content. Second is create your slides, your worksheets,
any other things that you want to share. Third, you want to make sure that your content is very clearly outlined and then you either record directly into a cell phone or an iPad.
Use an external mic or you number to record directly into zoom, either by yourself or with inviting other people to join and you save that recording from zoom and you utilize that to share with other people in the future.
Or option number three is using E cam live. Ecamm live is by far the most advanced in the best quality video recording that you can do,
but it does require a bit of tech training and we’ll go ahead and share resources to the best YouTube or we know that gives free E cam live business trainings.
We lovey cam live. We’re just actually testing this more and more for our business. We’ve used cam to record our podcasts and Skype forever and this is a,
this is a new advanced tool we’re using to create other types of videos for you guys as well, so hopefully these steps really simplified the process of creating video.
Number one, I want you to walk away with understanding that it doesn’t have to be perfect and it’s not going to be perfect.
I look back on some of the first online courses I created 13 years ago now and of course I wish that I had done things differently.
Of course we have certain audio issues in places and the lighting wasn’t that great, but the reality is is the content was amazing and people loved it and I made a lot of money and that’s what I want for you.
It doesn’t have to be perfect to get started. The other thing that I want to bring up is it,
so many businesses right now are launching online. The consumer now in 2020 is much more forgiving than they ever have before.
We’re hearing actor voiceovers with echo in the background coming on through our TV channel because people aren’t in recording studios right now and we don’t care.
As a matter of fact, there’s a certain sense of the fact that it’s super cool and real and authentic,
so it doesn’t have to be perfect right now and people don’t expect it to be perfect. There’s never been a better time to launch your online course,
to launch her online materials, to bring your content to the world in an online way, and so don’t make perfect the enemy.
Don’t stop in your tracks because you don’t know how to move forward. First, go through, decide how you’re going to share your content and whether or not you need deliverables or visuals to help and then jump in and just start recording.
You can always use video editors like I movie to cut out parts where you don’t really like what you’ve said or to brighten up the background and just really kind of change the lighting in there.
You can always use tools to make it better and better, but the point is to just really get started and start bringing your content online.
This is not just a strategy for right now, although everybody’s using it right now. This is a strategy that my company has been teaching businesses to do for now 15 years.
By bringing your content online, by going from offline to online or being a newly launching online business in scaling so you can serve more people.
The way you do that is creating content that can be shared across the board in video is King people want and they are willing to pay you for it,
especially if you’re creating content that they really want and that your offers are hitting it on the nose as far as what their pain points are right now.
If you’re struggling with that, you want more help creating your offers. Shoot us an email to hello@sweetlifecode.com and we’ll give you the information on joining our next group case study program where we’re working with entrepreneurs to help you build your new online offers that are going to be the bridge for your company right now and to make sure your company is leading in the future.
Again, you can just shoot us an email to hello@sweetlifecode.com and we’ll send you the information on our next group study program that we are launching and all of the show notes from this episode can be found by visiting sweet life podcast.com forward slash one seven three I’m also going to make sure that we include links to the E cam live,
obviously zoom, which is not hard to find nowadays, but I’m also going to put some other links in there for you as well,
including the platforms that we recommend for actually uploading your content and sharing online content, online courses and membership sites.
I’ll make sure that those are there for you in the show notes as well so that you can not only take today’s action steps but you can take them a step further.
Thank you so much for tuning into the show. I love chatting with you guys. Thanks for bearing with us while we record podcast content every single week based on what you need.
Thank you for being patient when my teenage boys are Outback and my dog is barking and I just really appreciate all of your support for this show over the years and all of our expert guests that drop in here to deliver you expert content.
If you have not yet, we would very much love it if you’d cruise over to Apple podcasts and leave us a review.
It would mean a lot. Not only that, we love to feature businesses that review us on Apple podcasts and so pop in there and give us a review and we’d love to give your company a shout out.
Thanks so much for tuning in. You guys hope everyone in your household as well, and everyone you love as well,
and let’s keep growing our businesses together. Talk to you soon. Bye. Bye.

Episode 172: How To Stay Relevant and Be A Leader – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join THE SHIFT 2020: 
  1. Text “shift” to the number 31996
  2. Send us a DM here to get more info
  3. Or Email april@sweetlifeco.com to learn more

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for entrepreneurs and small businesses who fearful that you’re losing your grip on relevance. You’ve worked years to build your audience, email your list, engage your followers, create awesome content… but you’re no longer “needed” and so you’re losing your following. 

Summary:

If you’re a small business owner whose audience has become silent, you’re no longer leading your people, or you’re losing your relevance, this show is for you. As the world shifts, so must your business. Not forever, but for now and one big important part is staying relevant so people keep their eyes on you. 
 
How do we do this? The answer defies all things you’ve ever heard about marketing… DITCH THE PLAN! It’s time to serve the world, not sell the world. 

Highlights:

  1. Know the 3 Types Of Content You Should Create And Share Right Now 
  2. Stay relevant
  3. Ditch your plan (for a short time) 
  4. Hold the reins of leadership with confidence 

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

you’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probe Age Hey, guys, welcome back to the show Episode number 172 here of the sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast. And I’m April Beach, your host and your business coach here on the show. And ah, my purpose here is to equip you with tools and strategies that you can take to the bank and apply to your business right away. If you and I don’t know each other yet,
I’m a business development coach and strategist, and I help entrepreneurs and small businesses launch and scale online. And everything we do here on the show is proven tools and strategies that you can literally apply to your business right now and see a difference. And that’s our commitment to you. So today on the show, this is episode number 172. We’re gonna be talking about a lot of things, and I want to make sure that you know where to find. The resource is if you haven’t yet cruise over to sweet life podcast dot com,
and you can even enter Ford slash 172 to get to this episode directly. We have tons of free business tools there for you, especially those of you guys who are trying to launch and scale your business online. It’s certainly the best resource is out there, and our commitment is to just wow you with some incredible free stuff that other coaches charge thousands and thousands of dollars for So crews over the sweet life podcast dot com. That’s where all of the behind the scenes information in details can be found. So this particular episode we are talking about how to stay relevant and how to be a leader,
and then we can put a little parentheses behind it in times of economic downshift, cause that’s where we are. So these strategies and I’m talking about on today’s show strictly apply to where we are right now in our global economy. These probably would not be the same tactics that I would be sharing with you. Ah, year from now and they certainly are not the same ones that I was teaching you 12 months ago on this show. Okay, so want to make sure that if you’re listening to this and it’s not real time were in the middle of this cove it economy we’re starting to see the light of the end of the tunnel in this show is designed to make sure your relevant your leader and people are bouncing back to you and your business and your products.
After this little, strange time in the world is over. So everything we’re talking about on the show today is for that purpose. So this is for those of you were established business owners, nuance online entrepreneurs that are launching or you have an established online business and and you want to make sure you’re holding your grip and you’re holding the attention of those people that you’re called to serve. All right, So if you’re ready, let’s go ahead and dive in together. Or the truth of the matter is for many of you guys,
you have worked years to build your audience. You have created amazing content you have had on opportunity to connect with people. On a deep level, your list has grown. You have worked really, really hard. You’ve done everything right or is Lee at least is right as you possibly could have tried is a business owner. You’re getting traction. All of a sudden we hunted. We hit this brick wall, right? And there’s a chance that your business is one of those businesses that doesn’t fall where we wanted to fall in the order of importance right now based on our economy.
So when things slant down in the economy, people fall back to you can consider, like NASA’s hierarchy of needs, right? So on the bottom, we have, you know, the essentials food, shelter. And then, as as you go up in that structure and we’ll put a link to this for you in the show notes if you want to take a peek up at it. But as you go up in that structure, then you go into the top of it where it is things that people want,
like desires, deep desires and, you know, wealth and prominence and lifestyle freedom. Well, if in the past you have sold something that is on the top of that pyramid, there’s a really good chance people aren’t buying it anymore. And so therefore, there’s a really good chance that people aren’t listening to you anymore because you don’t have what they need and what they want right now. So if you’re a small business owner who’s audience has become silent, you’re no longer leading your people because, frankly, they’re not turning to you.
It means you’re losing your relevance. And so this show is really important for you to listen to, cause we’re gonna talk about different ways to pivot out of that. And, you know, as the world shifts, your business has to shift. And here’s the one thing I want you to know. It’s not forever you guys, but it could be 45 60 9100 and 20 days. And so I want to make sure that during this undefined period of time that you and your brand and your company are remaining incredibly relevant so that as we get out the other side of this,
you’re already at the top of people’s minds. It’s not like relaunching your business from scratch, because here’s the deal. The people that don’t remain relevant during this time, it’s going to be like starting back up again from scratch. And if you’ve been through the from scratch type of relationship, building and in list building recently. You know that that time and business building sucks, it’s really, really hard. And so we don’t want you toe have toe, get all the way back to number one. So in today’s show,
I want to dive into first of all what you could be doing immediately right now. And this is for sure.
Probably the only time that you will ever hear me say this. Number one. I want you to ditch your plan.
So what do I mean by that? I mean, if you had a content calendar that was planned out for the whole entire month of April and May and off your graphics air done and your content is in there if that content calendar doesn’t read the temperature in the room,
you could piss a lot of people off. Or frankly, they just might think you’re completely irrelevant in totally tune you out.
So I want you to really consider ditching the plan. It doesn’t mean that you can’t pick back up the plan when things start rolling again.
But those businesses that are continuing on as normal I know you have gotten some of these emails a za matter of fact,
some business people and leaders that I love. I’ve been getting emails from them, and I’ve unsubscribed because females are completely irrelevant and I think a little insensitive in Those leaders aren’t reading the room and you can tell that they have their plan.
They had their content written. They had their podcast recorded, you know, they had their articles already in line,
and they’re just going with it because they’re trying to pretend like everything’s fine. But everything is not fine.
And it’s okay to say that everything’s not fine for a little bit. I think it’s important as a leader,
as a business leader to remain relevant. So stuff number one is take a look. And if you need to ditch your plan,
you know, for heaven’s sake, stop downloading all those freebies. I instagram that say we’re going to give you your content to go live for the next 30 days.
Stop downloading those stop following a plan that comes from somebody else. You are the leader, and it’s time for you to lead.
Okay, so ask yourself these questions. What are people really listening to right now? What is being told?
Talked at poured into your clients right now. And what do they actually want to be listening to right now?
There’s a really good chance that what is coming at your clients, whether it be from you or somebody else.
If you haven’t made this sort of pivot shift, there’s a really good chance that is not what they want.
And so they’re going to start tuning out. And so I want you to ask yourself, What do they want right now?
Dig into their psyche, dig into their aspirations, dig into their fears, dig in to maybe some things that they’re dealing with that could possibly have nothing to do with your business at all.
But ask yourself those tough questions and ditch your plan if you need Teoh. The next thing is, I want you to start sharing connecting in leading.
All right, so more than ever before, you should be present. You should be live streaming. Know that.
Probably make some of you just like swallow your your heart because live streaming can seem really scary. And I’ll give you some tips.
Here. The end of this recording. Okay, so the end of this podcast, I promise you as I’m saying this out loud,
I’m going to give some tips that are gonna make live streaming really easy for you. Okay, But let’s get through the strategies here that I have for you.
I want you to go live away to go live a lot. I want you to go live on your Facebook page.
I’m going to go live on Instagram. Wherever your clients are, focus your attention on the places your clients are,
whether it’s posting videos on lengthen, you know, even YouTube, whatever that may be. Be present and go live.
And here are three types of content that you can and frankly, you should be posting. Number one is content that connects you to your audience.
This is a big one right now. This might actually be over 60% of the content that you are posting right now.
Content that connects you to your audience are behind the scenes, you know, kind of showing people what’s going on in your life in your home,
how you’re setting up your home office, how you’re managing your team’s air remote, working with your teams.
Those are things that are behind the scenes content. That’s content that connects you to your audience. It shows that you’re vulnerable.
It shows them what’s happening, and it shows them that you’re cool with them, not seeing everything perfect.
When you show up like that, it opens the door for them to talk back and say, Hey,
you know what? Things aren’t perfect here, either, and it starts a dialogue and it starts a conversation in what’s really cool about it is it creates connections with your existing audience about new things.
So if you previously might have, I had a connection with your audience because you’re a graphic designer, and certainly that’s why you’ve connected with them.
They hired you to do their graphic design. Now you might find that you’re connecting because you both loathe homeschooling or you both Can’t,
you know, figure out how to come up with something new to cook for dinner. You know when we’re in quarantine.
So finding those connection pieces is so valuable right now in a note to those of you guys who are brands.
So if you have a brand and you yourself aren’t your brand, right? So if you have a business with you know 10 15 25 employees and you’re wondering like how we show up here authentically as a company as a brand.
You can still do this. People want to see the CEO. People want to see the marketing director take turns taking over the companies INSTAGRAM account and going live take turns popping in and posting.
You know, videos about how you’re doing things behind the scene on Facebook. It doesn’t matter if you’re a brand or you’re in individual brand or company ran an individual ground number one.
Creating content that connects is the most important thing for you to do. Right now, Number two is creating content that proves that you know what you’re doing.
So this could be pictures of you with clients in the past social proof testimonies, screenshots of D. M’s that people are sending to you screenshots of emails for the other clients,
or sending to you asking questions and talking about how you work with other people, how you been able to get other people of results in the past and just reminding your audience that you really,
really good at what you do, even if you might be doing it a little bit differently right now.
or even Perhaps, if you’re not serving clients at all right now. So the 1st 1 is content that connects.
The 2nd 1 is content. That proves that you know what you’re doing. And the 3rd 1 is content that teaches.
This is content where you’re gonna share your coaching, your expertise, data leadership You’re pouring in. What it is that you do as a leader,
as a business leader in your area, your niece, your area of expertise. So I want you to start sharing these three types of content regularly.
Want you to ditch the plan, Look at the content of your sharing and make sure it’s relevant to what is happening right now.
And my challenge to you is to do this. Number one Seriously, stop hiding out. I know it’s hard to show up when you don’t know how you should be showing up,
but the first step is showing up. So show up and be present. That is going to solidify that you’re strong and you’re a leader.
But you’re also vulnerable. And you’re willing, Teoh, just show up for your people. I recommend that you go live seriously.
Seven days for the next seven days straight. I recommend that you go live on your social media feeds.
It might seem like overkill, especially if you’ve never gone life before. Ah, lot of reasons why we do this is because the Social media algorithm,
frankly, when you go live the first couple of times, there’s nobody that’s gonna be there. It doesn’t show people that you’re going live.
And so after you do it a couple of times, whether it’s instagram or Facebook, it’s going to start to catch on to be like,
Hey, you know, April’s live again. It’s gonna start start showing it to more people. But what it does is it also shows your commitment to your audience and that you want to be president.
You want to be there for them. You can also share what you’re struggling with and create these common connection points,
whether it’s parenting or loneliness or the fact that you’re drinking way too much wine or what we call it,
like the cove, it 18 instead of like the freshman 10 or the freshman 20. Whatever college freshman you know,
pounds were on the cove, it 18 you, right? You know, if you’ve been sitting there eating bond bonds and drinking wine and you know,
whatever. Share that, just be Rheal and eat and be who you are and show your strength. Even if you don’t feel like it,
we’ll be sure with you like a little case study. I, of course, have been doing this myself before.
I’m gonna come on here and tell you guys to do this because I always want to make sure I’m giving you proven strategies that work in your business.
And I’m not very often live on my Facebook page, and I have started running. Now, don’t laugh too loud.
I’m a terrible runner. You buys it is between like teen in my knees, earning. I mean,
I suck it running, okay? And so I went out for a run on Saturday and there was snow all around me.
I just had to get out of the house. I wanted to push my body. I was craving that and in the middle of my run,
in a nice excuse for a NH opportunity to breathe, I pulled out my phone and I did a live stream,
and I did a live stream, you know, just regarding data and the trajectory of businesses. I looked like shit.
I was out of breath. I was just canting. You could clearly tell I was not some agile runner out there,
and I did This live stream video lasted, you know, maybe like six minutes in that video got organically more views than any of my other live streams of me sitting here in my office.
Why? Because people wanted to see that I look like shit. People had to see what I was doing that had nothing to do with,
you know, business development strategy. And I think that people also wanted to see the fact that I’m pushing myself.
I want to see my leaders pushing themselves, because when I see people that I follow when I see people that I admire what that when I see people that I learned from pushing themselves to new levels even when it seems out of place or impossible or don’t feel like it,
it inspires me to be pushed to do levels to. And so that’s just a little case study. And I just want to encourage you in that so show leadership inspire,
encourage, be uplifting and be strong, even if you don’t feel strong, Believe me, I did not feel strong making that video,
and I certainly didn’t feel strong running. Okay. And the next thing is to be the glue. If you have an opportunity to create a community in a connection amongst your clients and your fans and your followers,
do it. Now is a perfect time to launch a Facebook group. Now is a perfect time to create some sort of connection or community,
whether it’s a text group or a boxer community, whatever it may be, now is an excellent time for you to create that group and lead that group through this uncertain time.
In doing these things, you are going to remain relevant in doing these things. You are going to show your strength and leadership,
even if the things that you’re talking about don’t necessarily directly relate with the primary signature service or offer that you have released in the past.
But we want you to stay strong. We want you to stay top of the mind off your followers so that after this time is over,
you don’t have to build these relationships from scratch, and the best way to do that is to lead authentically and to show up often,
especially right now. You have a captive audience. Everybody is home. Everybody’s online more than ever, and now is the time to step out and be present.
Okay, Before I wrap this up, I promised you that I would share a little tip about live streams.
Number one. If you want to practice going live, join us in our Facebook community. It’s sweet life community dot com.
It’s a totally free Facebook community. There’s awesome small business owners and their and we do these things where we actually let you practice going live in our Facebook community because sometimes it’s weird and you don’t know where to look,
and you don’t know what buttons to push. Cruise over to sweet left interview. Not common. Join us,
but here the tips I was going to give you When you are speaking to a camera, whether you’re going live or you’re talking to a video camera and recording videos or you’re on television,
for example, this is how I originally learn. This is when I used to contribute to our local news stations here in Colorado.
When you’re looking at a camera, think about the fact that you’re only talking toe one person. If you think Oh my gosh,
I’m talking to the masses and thousands of people are watching me right now and thousands of people are looking at me.
You will totally freeze and it will be really awkward and it’ll scare you to that, right? But if you just picture that you’re talking toe one person,
that only one person is going to see this and whatever’s on your heart or your mind, whatever you want to share,
whether it’s business or personal, whether it’s you know, that content that proves you’re the expert or content that coaches people,
you’re only talking to one person. When you look at that camera lens, OK, I promise you,
if you only think one person’s looking, a look at this one person is going to see it, and that’s this One person talking to right now is my ideal client.
You can even name that person if it helps you. You can even picture one of your friends on the other side of that camera.
That’s the tip. That’s how you get over the fear of live streams and the fear of life video because you know what?
In the end, technically, any time we create content, we want to only create that content for that one ideal audience,
that one ideal client until by thinking these things, you’re not off base because, in fact, anything you’re saying is for that one ideal client.
So that’s your tip for getting over life. Okay, today we talked about the importance of showing up and being relevant.
We talked about ditching the plan if you have had a plan in place, and it totally is unrelated to what’s happening right now,
we talked about the three different types of content, but you should be sharing number one content that connects,
showing people behind the scenes and what you’re doing. Number two content that proves that you’re a badass. That’s content that shows testimonies from people have you worked with or pictures of people you’ve worked with or you know,
anything that can share that You know what you’re doing that you’ve helped other people get awesome results, and then the third type of content is content that teaches,
and this is content that shares your expertise to give some tips in different sorts of ah insider know how that comes from an expert like you.
All right, And then one more thing. If you have an offer, if you’ve developed a new habit offer that you have for people,
let them know that. Invite them to join your pivot plan and bite them to join your offer. Invite them to join what it is that you’ve done,
but do it in a way that you’re connected with them authentically. The most important thing here is that we aren’t selling.
The world were serving the world during this time. And so any plan that you create should be serving the world and not selling the world in your content in your social media,
and your messaging should come across that way as well. And if you’re struggling with losing leadership and you don’t have a product,
you’re not sure how to pivot or your business is becoming less relevant. Now is the time to make the shift.
I’ve been working with a small group of entrepreneurs and established small business owners to help them create offers, scaling from offline to online and bringing offers into the picture that your clients actually really want need offers that can really,
truly be a life raft where your clients are right now, if you aren’t really sure how to scale your business online,
what actual virtual offers to create what that means to the big picture of your business. If you’re struggling to choose that online business model,
and if you’re struggling because you don’t know how to create messaging, that’s really authentic, and you want to make sure you’re companies still profiting,
then I invite you to learn more about what I’m doing with this small group of businesses. We’re calling it Shift 2020 and to get more information on that,
you can just go to the show notes for this episode. Or you can simply text the word shift to the number 31996 and I’ll send you a link on where you can get more information.
All right, you guys, I hope you’re doing well, and I hope this message finds that everybody in your household is well.
Also, I love connected with you. Thanks so much for staying tuned with me here again, Resource is for you Are number one went to the show notes for this episode at Sweet Life Podcast dot com ford slash 172 Resource number two is to join our free Facebook community.
You can find that by visiting sweet life. Community dot com and Resource number three is to join me in shifting your business for 2020 so that you stay profiting,
leading and your marketing in the right ways. To get more information on shift 2020 you can just text to the word shift to the number 31996 Or you can cruise over to the show notes,
and they’ll be a link for you to learn more about shift 2020. All right, help! You guys are awesome.
Talk to you soon. Bye for now.

Episode 171: Should You Pivot Your Business Right Now? – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Need faster business growth? Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for entrepreneurs and small business who aren’t sure if you need to shift your offers, confused about how/if you should be marketing and who want clear answers as to if you should hold tight or make changes. 

Summary:

This episode is for entrepreneurs and small business owners who aren’t sure if you need to shift your offers, confused about how or if you should be marketing your services online. We cover the 3 greatest dangers to small businesses are facing and thoughtful solutions to overcome each pitfall. This show will help you identify what stage of action your business is in, if it’s time to move, and how to move with intention based on what’s appropriate right now.

Highlights:

  1. Identify your business position grasping on to the current business opportunities
  2. Identify the 3 biggest pitfalls small businesses and entrepreneurs are facing and how to overcome each
  3. Change your mindset to become a leader and build strong relationships

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

you’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probe Age Hey, guys! And welcome to episode number 171 On today’s show, we are talking about the shift, also known as your pivot plan. I wanted to dive into this because it’s really timely to be really honest with you. I had been avoiding recording to show strictly on pivoting based on the wave of the economy and the way that our world is.
And this is very strange time that we find ourselves in because a part of me kept waiting to just wake up the next morning and it would be different. And even though I knew in my mind that rationally that was not gonna happen, I kept hoping for it. So I feel like I wish that I had released this to you two or three weeks ago. But here it is now, because it’s really important that we talk about the three dangers that entrepreneurs and small businesses air facing right now and what you can be doing to shift your business to pivot your business.
It’s also really important that we dive into how long is this pivot for and what to do if you feel like you don’t want to pivot. And so that’s the gist of everything we’re talking about on today’s show and you’re gonna leave with very clear strategy is very clear. Questions. To ask yourself to answer your own personal questions is, should I shift and should I pivot my business? How do I know whether or not I need to make changes and how confident I am? I as a business leader to the people that I’m responsible to take care of,
which are your clients and your customers in yourself in your own family? How am I doing right now in this current very strange world that we’re all a part of? And how can I find the opportunities within what’s happening right now to protect and rise up myself on those people around me? Those are all the questions were answering on today’s podcast. If you’re on the go, which you shouldn’t be, by the way, you all should be staying at home. But if you can’t take notes, cruise over to our podcast website,
which has found its sweet life podcast dot com where all the show notes from everything we talk about today and links and resource is I’m gonna be sharing with you in today Show to give you actionable items that you can do right now to make smart decisions for your business. All of those air found over at sweet life podcast dot com. Okay, let’s dive into today as we talk about pivoting as we talk about shifting the biggest danger. Actually, that face is small businesses and entrepreneurs is our mindset, and I’ve been in round tables hand smog herb leadership meetings online.
Now for about I think the first leadership meeting that we actually held was now over a month ago or right around four weeks ago. Seems like 4000 years ago. But I’m still hearing the same questions, and you might be asking these questions and there, you know, what should I be doing right now? Should I be selling? Should I be marketing what I sell? How do I connect with people? What will people think of me if I sell right now? Should I be reducing my prices? And I’m hearing statements like I’m lost,
I’m stuck. I’m afraid I don’t know what to do. We’ve been talking a lot about this in my podcast community. By the way, if you are in this place as a small business as an entrepreneur, you should not be doing this alone. Cruise over to my podcast group. My Facebook group is totally free. You should not be here alone. And so I want to make sure that you’re getting connected with other like minds. Really cool, amazing people that can help you through that. So you could just go to sweet life community dot com and join us in the Facebook community in there.
So little side note Resource number one for you. So let’s dive into this. The mindset problem is that you aren’t really sure what to do. And so you may feel lost or confused about this and not really sure how to take action. There are three types of people three times of business owners that have been identified, two responding in certain ways during this shift that were going through, I learned about this in a leadership meeting. I was really fortunate for really thankful to be in been taught. Hermann was speaking in this meeting,
and he was explaining that there are really three kinds of people and how they’re responding. And these air from CEOs of big, huge companies down to, you know, solo entrepreneurs and freelancers said that first of all, there’s this a type of person who is totally stuck, right, not taking any action at all. They aren’t pivoting. They’re moving, they’re doing anything. It’s almost like if you’re this person, you feel like you’re your feet are stuck in wet cement, this solidifying around you and you can’t take any action at all.
You might feel some depression. You obviously feel anxiety and fear, and you aren’t changing anything in your business or whatever, because you feel completely out of control. You feel like you have no control over anything in, so you are just completely subdued in your space. First of all, if this is you, it’s okay is a matter of fact. The majority of businesses are still in this place. You are not alone.
I understand that. And then there’s this second person, so Category B, I guess we’ll call it.
The second person is this entrepreneur who is willing business owner willing to make moves, willing to pivot, willing to make adjustments.
But there’s no direction. And so there’s zero confidence in that. Like you want to do something you want to move,
you’re looking to move, and maybe you’ve been trying a bunch of little different little things, and nothing is sticking and you’re not really sure what direction to go.
So there’s no clear plan, no confidence, and you’re only doing like the bare minimum. And then there’s the third entrepreneur.
So Group C, which actually makes up at the time that I heard the data of this lesson. 9% of all business owners in this group is the one that is pivoting,
taking action scene opportunities, creating solutions and actually making moves. That’s only 9% of people all right, and even out of those 9%.
Most of them are not sure at all what moves they should be making. They’re just making moves in making big steps because they refuse.
Thio, frankly, be a victim and I have their business. Be a victim of what’s happening, so wherever you are,
wherever you find yourself in this first, I want you to know that you are not alone until we’re gonna dive into some of these mindset issues and how to help you solve them.
Therefore, giving you the questions in the action steps toe act upon to help you make smart decisions for your business in the direction that you will go.
So if you find yourself in this place where your mindset is saying I don’t know what to do, you know,
and you’re you’re kind of weekend of every day feeling a little lost, wondering what’s gonna happen. What should I do now?
What should I sell which I offer? The reason why you’re in this situation is because you don’t feel valuable.
You don’t have an offer that people desperately need. Right now, you don’t have confidence in what you’re saying,
and so perhaps you just aren’t saying anything at all, and you, frankly don’t have a plan. And the reason for that isn’t because you want to,
like, sit there and not do anything. It’s because I totally believe this is that you want to make sure that whatever you offer whatever you do is good and helpful and worthy.
It’s not because you don’t want to do anything. It’s because you really want to do the right things.
Does that sound like you? I’m betting that you’re like shaking your head, being like, yeah, that’s me.
You want to do the right things. You only want to offer something that’s good and hopeful and relevant.
You don’t want to take advantage of the situation, and you would never take advantage of people. We know that.
But you also know that there are business opportunities out there and you want, and you need to make sure that they’re not passing you by,
especially right now. So if that’s you, let’s go ahead and go into the next section of this recording here.
Okay, I want you to be aware of three really big dangers. And when I say them out loud,
it’s not gonna be like Thanks for the epiphany, April. It’s gonna be Yes, April, Captain.
Obvious. But just bear with me here because as we talk through them, I believe that in these discussions it’s gonna help.
You really kind of reframe your mind and help you identify if and how you should be pivoting are shifting in your business.
So danger number one that we’re seeing that I’m hearing from my clients that people on my communities we’re talking about and actually on this one I mean,
I’ll be honest with you. People aren’t talking about this as much as they are dangerous two and three.
So this one you can hear in the whispers of everybody’s subconscious. The problem is, is it you might be losing your relevance like that Hurts,
especially for those of you guys who have worked years to build your audience, is years creating content, sending it out every single weekend,
email faithfully doing your live streams, creating content again and again and again. If you’re afraid you’re losing your relevance.
It feels like you might be losing that leadership role like no one is looking at you for help because they don’t see you as somebody that can be relevant to help them.
Right now, you could be feeling like you’re losing opportunities to connect with your audience and that there’s this chasm that is growing whiter and whiter,
and it’s gonna be a really long jump to get from where you were in your relationship, and you know your banter and your friendship and your back and forth,
you know that you might have had with your with your community and your fans and your followers and your lists and your clients and your customers.
So what’s gonna happen in the future that that kind of seems like on the way far side of this Grand Canyon,
and you’re just not really sure how big the Kenyans gonna be? And so if you feel like you might be losing your relevance,
that you might be coming insignificant to your audience, then that is a really big problem. That’s a boom indicator that we need to shift something so that you’re creating relevant content and you’re taking mindful actions and that your connecting authentically with your community in a way that meets them where they are right now.
Okay, now it’s brings us to danger to this is the completely obvious one that still people are not talking about is number three.
But y’all are thinking this, and that is your sales are in jeopardy. You know, we’re talking about finances.
They are a hard thing to discuss, especially when the going gets tough. But what happens then? That’s when the tough get going and that’s we’re talking about on this show.
If you’re in this place, if you’re feeling this pitfall, right, if you’re feeling this danger in your business now,
I will tell you not everybody is feeling this. I have clients whose businesses are thriving right now. What they had in their offers and what they do is just really aligned with what people need.
Right now. Our own companies are doing really well because we are online business developers. And so this isn’t the case for everybody.
But this may be the case for you. If what you’re selling is the wrong thing, you’re in danger of actually losing more and more income,
either established clients or and or not bringing in new customers into your business or you could be not selling anything at all,
so you could be selling things. But they just are the wrong things, and it just doesn’t feel good to sell those things right now.
Or you could have nothing to sell whatsoever at all that is relevant or nothing is selling. This can also be you if you’re feeling like you have an insignificant offer,
so you’re feeling guilty about what it is that you are in fact offering. Maybe you offer some sort of a lavish service,
and you just don’t really feel comfortable. Here’s one of things I want to say to you. And you.
I don’t hear this a lot because it isn’t super quote unquote. And I’m sitting here to myself doing my air quotes,
Strategic. But if you feel like what you’re offering, just doesn’t feel good to sell. Right now,
I really want to encourage you to listen to yourself that that is your intuition, that is your spirit,
that is, whatever you call it. That’s your own inner wisdom, saying, You know what? I’m just kind of getting a check here,
that it doesn’t feel this great to sell it. And if you are feeling that way, I just want to encourage you to listen to that.
You know, one of the things that also want to encourage you is that if you have offers in that,
they’re not really the right things. Your service is aren’t going anywhere. What we’re talking about here is creating a bridge or just a little detour out of some construction bumps in the road were just shifting gears a little bit for a little while to drive people back to where we were before,
but in the better way that we have ever been. Okay, So if you’re struggling with sales in this area,
I want you to really think about what are your clients, your customers? What are their greatest needs right now?
We talk about, you know, identifying the needs, coming up the solutions. That’s business. Wanna one right?
But I want you to go further with us. I want you to really think about it in a way that it’s like this.
Imagine a map you has. No, I’m a geek. I geek out over maps. I even,
like, used to draw on, create maps for fun. When I was a little girl, Imagine a map and it’s a road map of your client’s journey.
And in the past, especially for you established business owners, you have their journey mapped out for them.
That’s great. But something has happened, and you have to create a detour. And along the detour are a couple of different pitfalls that is even the old enough.
Listening to this, you guys remember the video game pitfall where we had to, like, actually grab the rope.
It was like an Atari game pitfall. Okay, well, that’s what’s happening right now. There are pitfalls along your clients.
Customers journey, whether you’re taking them to a journey of wellness or a journey to having a marketing plan or attorney to have a no well branded business where a journey to learning to speak on stage or write a book,
or a journey to re finishing antique furniture, or going from not having house to buying a house. Whatever the journey is right.
There’s, um, roadblocks, and you are responsible for creating a new path for them that brings them to the same destination britches in a different way.
And that’s what we’re talking about right now. That’s what’s important right now. If you’re feeling like your sales are in danger,
if you are in that group of businesses where you aren’t selling anything or you’re you’re starting to slip, then I want you to take a really hard look at what it is that you’re offering and the pathway that you are getting people from point a to point.
In this case, it’s just only see in the past you might have taken them from a to Z.
But right now, maybe they just need your help getting from A to F. And that’s cool. That is really important,
because that’s what they need right now. Less danger. Number two is your sales danger Number three and this is the one that everybody’s talking about.
Is is your marketing. And here is why everybody’s talking about it because nobody wants to sound like a sleaze bucket.
Okay, nobody wants to go out there in, sell their stuff and have people be like, Oh,
my gosh, that person is so insensitive. What? I can’t believe that she is out there just peddling her product when our world is in such a precarious state,
right? I know that you don’t want that. So if you feel like you’re risking being insensitive or if you feel like you don’t know what to say in your marketing or that you just can’t market as usual.
But you aren’t sure how to change that, that is another indicator for you. But you need to make a shift that you need to make a pivot the way that we do.
This is totally authentic. There isn’t any grand marketing strategy behind this. You guys. It is seriously just calling the elephant in the room out the way it is and saying,
Hey, Lis and we’re changing. Something’s up here just for a little while because things were different for a little while.
There’s nothing wrong with just calling elephant in the room like Sarah tomes. She was on last week’s podcast.
Sarah’s a very good friend of mine, and I’m very grateful that she’s our Facebook ad strategists and part of our team.
She’s like, You gotta read the temperature in the room, and if it’s too hot, let’s talk about the fact that it’s too hot.
So we’re going to turn on the A C. Whatever that ISS. Just take your marketing strategy head on and talk about the things that are already on your client’s minds.
Don’t pretend like they aren’t there. I’m not saying I want you to listen to me very carefully that you should not go with a Doom Sayer type of approach,
right? Nobody wants to hear more about the problems with the situations they’re having. They do want to hear from mindful,
authentic, full hearted leaders who are giving them solutions, cause everybody wants to be doing good and thriving and were craving.
I already feel it like, Don’t you feel it? Were craving our feelings of crawling our way back to greatness?
It feel it right now. I know you do, too. And so, with your marketing, your marketing should talk about why make Maybe you’re making some small shifts or pivots in your business or how you’re doing things different.
You’ve already seen the TV commercials doing it saying, Hey, we deliver, you know, contact free food delivery because we know that’s what you want.
Right now, that’s what you should be doing, too. So if you find yourself that you’re not doing any marketing or you’ve stopped marketing altogether,
it’s because you’re not really sure how to actually just take it as it is in share. It is it.
It’s and I just want to fill you up again with creativity and encouragement and telling you that you’re an entrepreneur.
You do not give yourself enough credit. As a matter of fact, entrepreneurs are the most important people right now.
Entrepreneurs are the ones figuring out how to get P, p e and from other places and how tow rig ventilators and how to come up with medicine to help all of us.
They’re entrepreneurs in their scientists, their creative people in you’re one of them, too. We’re the most creative,
disruptive, tenacious, tough, unstoppable group people on earth. So you can take your marketing and you can take all the thoughts that you have,
and you can pivot them and ship them to the degree in which they should be, which it could be a great deal for your business.
Or it could be just like a teeny tiny smidge. But talk about that. Talk about what you’re doing and why you’re doing it in your marketing.
Start with relationships, personally connect with people and really create ah, marketing communication that builds relationships. Dive into relationship with your clients.
It’s a very best thing that you could be doing right now, no matter what you do, pivoting in what degree in your business.
So today we talked about dangers, the businesses we’re facing right now, why you may be facing it.
And if you remember in the beginning I talked about the greatest dangers, our mindset, and we talked about all the different questions the business’s owners are asking themselves right now.
and you might have found yourself asking some of these questions. Then we dove into the three problems. The lack of relevance that your business maybe having the lack of sales in the lack of marketing in overall,
the lack of leadership. If you find that you’re struggling with what to do or what your place is right now,
it’s very simply because you have yet to create a solution that you go to sleep at night, vote really good about in know that people need because you might not necessarily see your business as a life raft that they need.
And if that’s the case, if that’s where you are, I want to encourage you to dive in and to really think about how you can and possibly should be shifting and pivoting just for a little bit right now,
in order to be what people want and need for you to be right now and in order to meet people where they are not in unauthentic way in order to build and create a bridge for your clients to walk from where they were with you,
toe where they will be with you again in the future when we all reset. I was on another leadership call a couple weeks ago with Jeffrey has led of Sea Sweetened.
It was it was a really cool call to be a part of. I don’t normally sit in C suite.
Leadership calls. As many of you know, I’ve never worked in a corporate office in the day of my life.
But it’s always a challenge for me to surround myself with people that do different things, you know? And one of the things that Jeffrey was saying was that we’re in a race to reset,
and that’s where we are right now. As an economy, that’s where we are. It’s not a fast race.
It’s actually really careful race. Instead, we should call it like a cross country run to reset and we’re having to take these detours is a business,
and we’re having to guide people along with us and to carry people. We are called to carry people and to serve people to the degree that obviously makes sense within your business.
So I wanted to let you know what just encourage you if you feel like you’re not being relevant right now,
if you feel like you’re you’re slipping, Your business is slipping. Take a look at those three danger areas.
Are you loosing relevance? Are you not selling things? And are you not really sure about what you should be saying in your marketing?
If those are the areas that you’re getting hung up, then then go back and replay this podcast episode.
And then here are two other resource is for you. Number one. I really don’t want you to be alone.
We need to connect, We need to support each other. And, like I said, lift each other up.
During this time, I invite you to join us over in our free Facebook community at sweet Life community dot com.
The second opportunity and this is not going to be there forever because thes podcast episodes air evergreen. This will be out there in 2021 2023 this will not be available.
But it is right now, So right now we have launched a program. It’s a short term program,
guys, because this is a short term fix in the program is called Shift 2020 and it’s a time for you to dive in,
not to everything this is not in everything program. This is a get what you need. Get your important ducks in a row for your business.
Identify what your clients need and delivered to that program. If you feel like you’re trapped and you’re losing significance and relevance with your audience that they aren’t looking to you for leadership or you’re losing the relationships that you have worked really hard to build for years and years and years or frankly,
if you have never established with the relationships with people before, if you are slipping in your sales or you’re losing sales,
we’re not bringing in any more clients than the shift is an important programme for you to be a part of right now.
And if you’re not really sure what to do in your marketing or how to communicate authentically or how to really pivot or what you should be doing,
who you should be connecting with, how often? How frequently, even though that means the same thing.
You know in what way, If you’re not sure about any of those things, then I highly recommend that you check out our shift program.
It’s called Shift 2020 again. It’s only a short term program. But what we do know is that we need to make some shifts for the next 30 60 90 maybe the next 120 days.
And this podcast and everything we do here is dedicated to helping you in your business. Arrive to the degree in which you may need to make a shift is only going to be revealed based on digging into the strategy and how people are responding and who you want to need to be is a business and is possibly a personal brand to your industry.
So if you guys want more information about shift 2020 here are two different ways you can find it. There’s no website for it.
There’s no long as sales page to join because that’s not what we’re doing right now, because that’s not relevant.
Right now, we’re just helping you get what you need immediately so that you can help your people get what they need immediately.
So for more information on the shift 2020 you can go to the show notes for this episode, so there will be a link in the show notes for the episode.
You can get there by going to sweet life podcast dot com forward slash 171 So sweet life podcast dot com forward slash 171 Or you can very simply text the word shift to the number 31996 will shoot over links.
You could just read more information on it. Let us know if you want in love to have you there.
It seemed like the right fit for you again. That is texting the word shift to the number 31996 All right,
you guys help your Well, I understand that things were rough right now things air give you a little tense here in the beach house also.
Ah, we have been on lock down at the day of this recording. I’m we’re on day 33 1 of my boys was just so restless.
He literally went outside golfing barefoot in the snow in our front yard today. So people are totally going crazy,
but we’re still here, and we’re well, and we’re thankful for that. And I pray that you guys were well and those that you know,
a few work on the front lines or somebody in your family does. We’re praying for you guys. And just thank you so much for for all that you’re doing.
Thanks for listening to the show and sharing it with your friends again. Show notes are at sweet life podcast dot com slash 171 and more information on the shift is by texting 31996 And just type in the word shift.
Okay, guys, Bye for now.
That’s all folks!

Episode 170: 7 Steps To Optimize Your Facebook Business Page – with Sarah Tomes and April Beach

Sarah Tomes SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join our FREE community!

Who This Episode is Great For:

Any business that wants to optimize their Facebook business page and has spent time winging it. Entrepreneurs who aren’t sure how to get more engagement on Facebook. 80% of businesses out there who are missing the basics that could be costing them thousands. 

Summary:

If you’ve created a Facebook Business Page, but you aren’t sure EXACTLY how to use it, you’re not alone. Over 80% of small businesses we meet with don’t have the basics of their page set up and could be losing thousands. In this week’s show Sarah Tomes, our in house Facebook Ads expert is delivering “7 Steps To Make Sure Your Facebook Page Is Good To Go”.

Highlights:

  1. How to create a catchy title banner that establishes you as a leader
  2. How and what you should be linking to in your posts (and why)
  3. What CTAs (calls to action) to use and which ones are a “no-no”
  4. The difference between Boosted Posts and Facebook Ads and how to choose the right one. 

Resources Mentioned:

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 57: How to Increase Organic Reach Through Facebook – with Sarah Tomes SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 60: Overcome Video Fears & Master Facebook LIVE – with Sarah Tomes SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 125: What You Absolutely Must Know About Facebook And Instagram Marketing Right Now – Part 1 – Sarah Tomes SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 126: What You Absolutely Must Know About Facebook And Instagram Marketing Right Now – Part 2 – Sarah Tomes SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 149: Using Facebook and Instagram Ads On A Budget, To Get Your Online Presence Ready For The New Year- with Sarah Tomes Todd Herman on Instagram SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast on Pinterest April Beach on Facebook

April Beach on Instagram


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

you’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probe age Hey, you guys and walk back to the show. I’m really glad you’re here. We’re diving into a topic that we’ve talked about many times previously on this show, and this is about leveraging Facebook and Instagram ads to grow your business. But specifically, what we find is a lot of people actually don’t have their Facebook business page set up in a way that’s gonna optimize the money that you’re spending on ads.
So I asked Sarah tomes, Who’s our in house? Facebook and Instagram Add strategist and the founder of Tomes Social Media to come back into the show into chat with us. Now, this is a perfect episode for those of you guys who you haven’t established Facebook page. But you either don’t know how to use it. You kind of just threw it up there, and you’re not exactly sure the features in there and how they can help you connect with your audience or grow your audience or you have a page,
but you haven’t leveraged the features like Facebook pixels, and you might have been spending money boosting posts with no results whatsoever. So for those guys who haven’t established business Facebook Page, this is a great show for you to make sure that you’re using the right. And then it’s also a great show for you if you have never set up your Facebook business page before we talk about the difference between business pages and personal pages. And no, some people use personal pages. Four business activities when Sarah actually breaks down.
So we’re talking about seven steps to set up your Facebook business page and to start connecting with your perfect audience and growing your audience. We’re diving into all these steps today on the show. If you haven’t listened to the show before. Welcome. I’m April Beach on my business development strategist and host here at the Suite Life podcast in all of the show notes that we are talking about. So the links in a recap of the show can be found by cruising over to sweet life podcast dot com forward slash 170 because this is episode number 170 now,
a quick note about the recording of this show. Right now, all of our kids were home. We’re home. My husband’s home. All three of my kids are home. Sarah’s home, her boys air home. Everybody’s home, which means that the Internet is pretty overwhelmed with band wit. And so we actually had trouble connecting and getting a great WiFi signal to record this particular podcast episode. And so because of that, instead of throwing the baby out with the bath water, we actually recorded this episode for you still in our sky platform but through a Skype phone call instead of the usual video that we do so a mind sound a little bit different than our regular recordings.
Thank you for bearing with us. Thanks for continuing to tune into the show, and I just wanted to give you guys a little heads up of it. Sounds a little different audio wise. It’s because we had to improvise, and that’s what we d’oh we’re entrepreneurs, right? But what we do, we figure out how to make it work, and we make it work. So we certainly did that on today’s show, and for those of you guys who have any questions about Facebook ads. How to set up your Facebook page in any of the things that Sarah’s talking about today On this show,
I invite you to join us in our free small business and women entrepreneur community over on Facebook. By tapping sweet life community dot com, you can just enter that in. It will redirect you to our Facebook community. We love to connect with you there. Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show. Hey, you guys, we are back again with Sarah tomes. Sarah is the sweet life company, so she’s our companies. Go to Facebook and Instagram ads strategist. She’s the very best of what she does.
And she frankly, she has to be to deal with us because I do a really good job of killing Facebook ads all the time. And for years, Sarah has been the one to make sure online ad strategy. It’s just X selling. She’s also the one that works with all of our clients, and so she’s always has her sleeves rolled up in our communities, and today we’re diving into how thio make your business Facebook page visible, so you’re attracting the right leads. How to use adds to connect with the right leads what the post went to post it and really overall,
how to set up your Facebook business page to be completely optimized in acting the exact way that you want it. Thio As we’re going through here, we’re gonna talk about a lot of things, But we want you to know that if you have questions, cruise over and join us in our community. This is a totally free community for women, small business owners and entrepreneurs to join. Sarah is in there all the time. She’s always giving, giving, giving. So if you guys have a question about anything we’ve talked about today,
join us over at sweet life community dot com and we’ll be there to support you. So, Sarah, welcome to the show. Besides, being are like superhero when it comes to Facebook and instagram ads, can you give yourself another introduction as faras? What? What else? You d’oh! Oh, hey, it’s good to be here again. I love doing these podcasts with you. It’s like girlfriend time so fun. I specialize in Facebook and instagram ads. You guys know that Facebook and Instagram with same company just a little bit different platform.
I focus on them because they it work. They’re the most authentic way to connect your brand to the people that you want to connect with as a brand. The arrow eyes are still amazing, and I just really enjoy it. And I think the thing that I like about it the most is I, you know, had a lot of trouble with it at first because it is so complicated. I think social media is just like people don’t know what to d’oh. It’s overwhelming, and I have been able to figure it out.
Make it easy. And I love helping people get through it and make it easy to understand. And I loving instead your community because it’s love answering questions and making sure that people don’t feel, you know, like they’re asking something that’s that’s silly. And there’s no silly questions inside of there. So that’s why you need to come join us so you can get all the help inside. Yeah, thank you so much. And you do you pour into us and what’s really interesting for those of you guys that are our listeners to the show?
You always listen to a state, sir, has been on a ton of these episodes, and so we’ve been talking about Facebook for years. She’s always in here giving, as you guys know, but one of things we find is that these questions that might feel like stupid questions in the beginning these questions don’t just come from new entrepreneurs. These are questions that established brands established companies that do have a social media presence that are either not understanding how to leverage that. Like all of these,
these questions come from all directions. So it’s not just you, and she is not joking you when she’s telling you she’s there to pour into you and help.
So thank you so much. So today on the show, we’re talking about seven steps to set up your Facebook business page and make sure it’s optimized,
meaning it’s gonna track the right people to buy from. You build a relationship from you and to establish your business,
your brand, how you want to be established into your space. So let’s go ahead and dive into the seven different steps.
We’re gonna roll on some of these here together, so the 1st 1 is obviously setting up your business page.
Some of the people that we talk Thio use their personal page as a business, so shot a little bit about that.
And then let’s talk about actually setting up a Facebook business page and and really, how to go about that?
Yes, if you have a business, you need to have a business page. You don’t want to be running your business from your personal page.
It’s maybe not technically against Facebook’s terms of service, but they don’t like it. I’ve heard of accounts or personal Facebook.
Page is getting shut down for conducting business because people don’t want to see that. You know, I I know that my friends don’t want to hear about Facebook ads.
They could care less, right, so you need to set up a business page. It’s very easy to do,
but it also has to have a lot of elements to make sure that your audience is connecting with you.
You have to remember that it’s essentially like a business card these days. You have to have one. You need to have a website.
You need to have a Facebook page. People are starting to really need to be on Instagram. Now we’re finding through studies that people sometimes go to Facebook instead of Google if they are interested in your business,
so you want to make sure that it really represents who you are. So the first thing that you need to establish is a cover photograph that’s the one of the top,
the long photograph for most businesses. I think it’s great Thio be focusing on now, like what you’re launching,
what product you’re pushing, what course you’re pushing, what often you’re pushing. That’s a really great way to do it.
If you don’t want to do that, makes something that’s very clear. Concise has maybe a little bit of text,
but not too much something that’s easy to read. But my absolute favorite timeline is not. A photo is actually a video that’s a fairly new feature to Facebook,
where you can put a video instead of a photographed anything of you doing anything looking like a boss, like speaking at an event that would be great.
Another way to take advantage of that timeline photo is, if you have any press accolades, that’s place to put it,
cause someone in Milan a little be like Oh, this business has been featured in this magazine or this publication,
and it gives credibility to your business. So the other thing that I really see people make a big mistake is your cover photo.
So it’s a very small right, and a lot of people will put like a group shot of her team and you can’t see it or they’ll put a version of their logo.
That’s really not easy to read if you were representing your company. If you’re the peace of your company,
use a professional shot. Use that same shot across all of your social media channels so that you’re easily recognizable,
whether someone’s on Twitter, LinkedIn, Instagram or Facebook. And I think April you had a good example of somebody who does that really well,
is it Todd Herman. Yeah, Todd Herman does a great job of that. If you guys follow Todd Herman on Instagram or even unlinked in its his head shot,
and then it’s a bright yellow background. So it’s super consistent, you know, across the board on all the social media platforms.
But then it’s also really eye catching its basic. It isn’t, you know, elaborate. It’s his head shot with a yellow background,
and it is by far like the best example that I have seen. If somebody doing that really well yet,
yeah, that’s a really important thing to do. And just make sure that it’s very easy to see.
You want to even look at it on a mobile phone, not just your desktop, cause it’s going to be even smaller there.
And then it’s even smaller on Instagram. Very, very small, right? Right. And you know,
one of the things that you’ve said to us before is that some people’s logos were really small. And so let’s talk about the use of an actual logo it in that place and what you recommend.
Whatever version of your logo is the easiest to read in the most recognizable that has, like the most color is the one that you’re gonna want to use.
You don’t want to use something that’s really, really busy because no one will be able to recognize you across the different channels.
Yeah, thank you so much for saying that I love it. I love the video idea, certainly,
and I think that would be very eye catching if I went to somebody’s Facebook page. I would certainly stop and watch what they’re doing in the video,
for sure. So that’s step one step from our two. People want to know When should they post how frequently you know what time of day it really?
What content should they be putting out there? What’s your take on that right now? Because this changes.
I mean, let’s face it. We’ve recorded the show similar to this, and we’ll record more down the road and it could be totally different based on what’s happening right now,
which is why it’s so important to stay on top of these things. Well, what’s going on right now is that Internet traffic is way up,
right, because we’re at the time of this recording were all at home working s O. This is the ultimate time to get in front of your audience,
So typically I would recommend about three times a week. I don’t really think it’s worth it to get worked up and feel like you have to post like,
five times a day. You don’t. You just need to post quality content, and one thing that is very important is to make sure that if you’re posting and you’re letting somebody go off of the Facebook platform that they’re going to one of your assets,
So they’re going to your website. They’re going to your blogged. They’re going to Anything that you own is better than sending them to an article.
I see a lot of business owners they like, Oh wow, I found this great article on entrepreneur dot com Then entrepreneur dot com Get your traffic and they own your traffic.
So if you could send them to your website, that is so much better. I’m not saying you don’t You can’t post things like that,
but really try to make a habit of not doing that very much. Another type of post that is the most valuable is video posts,
and especially if it could be video of you or what’s going on inside of your business. Video is just the most wonderful way to connect with people.
We all grew up watching television, and we connect. We does national. We connect through video. That’s what we do.
And Facebook loves video, and they we’ll give you preference if you use it. And I know April and I’ve had discussions about how difficult it can be too comfortable around video.
But this is the time to do it. And you know what? You could even come inside of our group in post video and no one’s gonna judge you.
You can come in like, bone up everything right? I love that you just said that. So before this recording,
I just got off the phone with a perspective client for our business that wants to work with us and where she was sharing about how difficult it is to really get the routine of posting video.
And so let me share with you guys to some of the stuff that I just said to her. So when you’re recording a video,
whether it’s live or it’s a pretty apart of video, I want you to just imagine that you’re talking to a one person like your ideal client.
If you’re sitting there and you’re looking at your camera, you’re looking at your laptop and you recorded a video,
and it gets really overwhelming when you hit record. It’s because you’re imagining that you’re speaking to the potential masses,
you know, and it gets really intimidating. You kind of forget what you’re saying so The reality is,
is when you first go live, You guys, nobody’s gonna be there watching you. You might get one view here,
one of you there because people aren’t used to you going live. That’s normal. It happens to everybody.
The more you do that, the more people are gonna be like, Oh, hey, great. You know,
Julie’s going live in and I can’t wait to see what she’s posting today or you know, any other video.
So, you know, first of all, like just bring it back to the basics. Just imagine you’re talking to one person.
We could do a whole nother. I won’t continue going on attention on that, but I love what Sarah said to So we have,
like, practice going live sessions in our Facebook community, and that is literally for us to go in there and practice going live in the community before you go.
11. Your business page. You’re totally welcome to do that in our free entrepreneur community. People do it all the time,
and they’re like, Oh, my gosh, where do I hit this button and what I do and what I look like And can you guys hear me,
Okay. It’s totally a place for you to practice, so we just want to share with you that you’re welcome to do that.
Okay, So step number three is asked people to take action on your post. So what kind of action are we talking about?
Like, what does that mean for people that might not be aware? Well, you just want to remember the Facebook is a social platform.
And if you have social interactions with your audience, you’re going to be rewarded in the algorithm. So if I post something and I’m starting to get a lot of likes Ah,
lot of people are commenting. They’re sharing the post than that says to Facebook. Okay, this is a good post.
We’re going to start showing it more. Ah, lot of people make the mistake of saying, you know,
like, comment and share, and that’s actually something Facebook does not like. So you just want to ask questions.
You want to get them to have conversations with you and each other When they comment on your post, make sure that you reply thoughtfully.
I see so many businesses just with very lame replies that are probably you know some sort of pot or employees.
That’s not getting them to engage. But if they answer a question, asked him a question. Keep the ball going,
make it like a volley and that we will really get things going now when you were doing a Facebook alive and you can say something like,
you know, press the heart button. If you agree, that’s fine to do. And that’s I think a really good strategy to get your Facebook live going is to get them to comment,
get them to hit that heart button, and that will trigger the algorithm to give you the more organic reach.
Yeah, love that, too. So the difference between calling Tau action, like on a live stream versus calling the action on a on a static poster video.
Okay, so, you know, you had an example, and I think it’s important to share examples to reassure some,
but like an interior designer and the post that she was doing, I love that example. Can you share that hurt here?
Just so people really know what it is that you’re talking about? Like the color of the foursome. Yeah.
Say, if you were redecorating your office and you were trying to decide what color to paint your walls or whatever.
Asked them Thio give their opinion cause that will connect you to them. It makes the algorithm decided that they like the post and the more people will see the post.
So stuff like that is fun. Like I really like when businesses do post like that where you can give an opinion.
And it’s a really great way for you to ask your audience questions on what’s going on with them. I think that you can ask them thio like Post where they’re working from today.
Like opposed to picture. Show me. Show me your virtual office like you re a picture of your animal is your co worker you just get creative with?
Yeah, totally. I’m gonna go do all those right now because everybody’s home right now. Okay. So step number four is get verified.
So talk to us about what does it mean to be a verified account? And who needs this? Yeah.
So when I talk to people about getting verified, they think about the blue badge or the blue checkmark on instagram.
That’s for public figures and celebrities and global brands. That’s not what we’re talking about right now. Getting verified is a process that you go through because Facebook wants pages on Facebook to be authentic and trustworthy.
We know that there are so many fake pages. Are there pages that have started and they just they’re dead.
So they want businesses that are trustworthy and what you dio is you go to the security center on your Facebook page.
That’s like where all of your privacy settings are. And there’s a section in there to get verified, and it depends on what type of business you have.
You’re a brick and mortar business, and you have a telephone that’s registered. It’s a really simple, just verification process with your telephone.
If you were like an online business, like most of us probably are, it usually requires that you,
like, upload your business documents like your LLC documents, and then sometimes they’ll ask for, like a website domain proof of ownership.
It takes about like four or five days for to get verified. But then, once you do, you have access to Facebook product’s developer futures,
and Facebook does a lot of really cool focus groups where they will pay you. They’ll give you gift cards.
You could be part of a study you could be part of. Ah, Beta testing sometimes will fly you out to Facebook headquarters.
Like if they notice that your pages doing some amazing things and it’s verified, You can really do some amazing things with Facebook.
So it’s just one of those things. Like while we’re around, we’ve got a huge to do list that we’re all going Drew right now.
Just do it. It takes, like, 15 minutes, and it’s really worth your time. And they don’t say that it increases your reach,
but I think it really does. If you have a verified business, okay, thank you so much for all those details.
All right. And then step number five is diving into creating your about section on your Facebook business page.
What are your best practices for that section? So that section is statistically the place people go when they land on your Facebook business page.
So you need to put a lot of thought and ever into it. And right now it really does allow you to pictures.
And there it allows you to write quite a bit of copy. It used to be very simple. So now is the time to really,
like showcase what your company stands for and why whoever’s landed should be interested in what’s in it for that.
It’s also a very unique opportunity for you to put a link to your Optima or to schedule a call or whatever it is in your business that people would want to know to get started.
So really, show your vision in there and get creative and connect with your community. In that about Paige,
that’s really, really important. Super. I love that love that so much and yes, posting the lead to the link to the lead magnet or get started or whatever it’s,
it’s absolutely perfect place to put that. And I don’t think people are utilized in That is a matter of fact.
I have been looking just kind of casually, and I haven’t really seen very many businesses doing that, and the way that it could be Okay,
so that was number five. Now six and seven, we’re going to dive into here. We can’t go in depth about them,
but there are some really important things that you want to share with our audience about these issues. We’re talking about Facebook ads,
and we’re talking about Facebook pixels. Let’s start with the Facebook pixel and really what it is, why businesses need it.
And we’ve talked about this numerous times on the show before. For years we’ve talked about the Facebook pixel,
and yet so many companies are missing this fairly easy, important step. Yes, I mean, I would say 80% of companies don’t have it installed,
which is mind blowing. All it is is a pixel code that you, uh, install very easily onto your website.
Used to kind of be a pain in the butt to do. But Facebook now integrates with, like squarespace,
WordPress wicks most of the major platforms to allow it to be just really a click of a few buttons.
You just goto business dot facebook dot com and you click on events, and that will take you to your pixel,
and it basically just takes you through the process and what it does. It’s that little piece of code that’s in charge of all the things that Facebook does that are totally creepy.
It follows you around the Internet. It tracks where you’re going, what you’re doing, what your habits are,
which is completely creepy. And it’s something that we all just like about Facebook, but as an advertiser and is a business.
It is a dream because you have so much intelligence on what your user is doing. So if you have it installed in your sight and you go to run Facebook ads,
you know exactly who has landed on what page, and you can re target them and do a lot of really creative re marketing.
And it’s, you know, a 5 to 10 minute process to get it installed. You may already have it installed.
If you had a decent Web developer, we hope that they put it on there for you. But inside of the community,
there’s a tutorial to figure out whether or not it’s installed on. And if it’s not installed, I can help you walk up the process.
Yeah, so definitely don’t hesitate toe to reach out and again, you can join us. It’s totally free community,
you guys. This is where we connect with other like minded women business owners. We love it, and Sarah’s in their relentlessly giving,
importing into this community So there is a video tutorial, and they’re showing you how to check whether or not your code is installed.
This is basic business, honestly, marketing 101 And I don’t know, maybe marketing companies charge for this,
but I love Sarah. She’s always giving first. And you know, we believe these are kind of basic things that you guys should have in orderto leverage your business account on Facebook and grow your business.
So cruise over and join us in sweet life community dot com. It’ll redirect you to that Facebook group,
and you’re you’re welcome to go in there, find that pixel post you can search in the community for that and the poster questions and tags era and them.
And she’s always in their connecting with you guys. So let’s talk about Facebook ads now. The most important question that I hear you get when you’re in doing business trainings in our community and everywhere else is why can’t I just boost my post?
Facebook makes it so easy to boost my post. And really, what is the difference between a boosted post and a Facebook ad?
Well, the boosted poster a very easy way to get your ads in front of an audience, but I found that typically they don’t do very well.
And the really big difference is you can’t see the data is to what’s going on, because if you’re starting an ad and it’s not working,
you need to know that it’s not working in these boost interests. Just don’t give you the data that you need.
They don’t allow for the building of audiences. So what you need to do is go to business at facebook dot com and get comfortable with ads manager and build your abs inside of there.
And then that way you can split test audiences. You can split test images. You can split test copy.
You can take a look at the data, and you can say, Okay, this ad is doing awesome.
I’m going to keep it running, or you can say it’s not and you have to adjust. But boosting post is a really it’s very easy to do,
and it’s not worth your marketing dollars to do that right now. Add costs are down about 60% and it’s a very,
very, very good time to get in front of your audience because They’re listening now. So true. So true.
Okay, so let’s recap a bit. What we chatted about here today. Seven steps Thio, Optimize your Facebook business page and get in front of your perfect audience.
We talked about how to set up that page. You gave some really awesome suggestions as faras the video in the header and really,
how to establish what it is that you want your audience to know within that that was so smart. I love that number two We talked about posting times three.
We talked about asking people to take action and how to ask them, like what kind of action they should be taking,
and you should be prompting them to do based on the type of post. We also talked about getting verified and what that means utilizing the about section to the best of your business.
And your options actually grow your list through that process. And then we dove into pixels and adds, Is there anything else that people you know really need to know right now and what’s happening,
or anything to stay away from? As a business owner? Just anything else you’d like to add to this Sarah This is a really good time to really know your audience and use your intuition.
It’s a very delicate situation right now where there’s a fine line that you have to be constantly aware of.
I know that like I scheduled some of my post and I went in, I was like, Scratch that that doesn’t exactly fit.
And I think a lot of businesses air sending out emails that aren’t addressing the elephant in the room. And you have to be.
You have to be aware of that. And I really believe one thing that not everyone is a copywriter.
A messaging could be very difficult, right? But follow big brands. They have the best copy writers in the world working on how to address the elephant in the room and how to be sensitive in the right words to use right now.
So, you know, watch your commercials during her who lose sessions, see what they’re saying. Open your e mails from trusted companies and listen to what words they’re using and just be very intuitive about how you should go about things.
And I think it’s different for different companies and just be careful. But also like you know don’t necessarily be a free to sell right now.
Don’t be afraid to grow. Your email is don’t be afraid to run traffic to your website. Don’t be afraid to run ads is actually a great time while we have people on the Internet to get your business in front of all of these people.
And it’s definitely at a way lower cost than it was a week ago. So maybe have the ad dollars to spend.
This is a great time to spend it growing your audience. I love it. Thank you so much,
Sarah. Thanks for all your wisdom and seriously just giving so much to our clients and those people that aren’t our clients.
Just the the entrepreneur community is general again. A few guys would like to join us, cruise over to sweet life community dot com and plug in there on our Facebook group for us or with us.
Give yourself an introduction and then tap in to Sarah for any questions you have about this episode or any of our other episodes were both in there all the time answering business questions.
Thanks so much for being on the show and you can find all the show notes for this episode of by cruising Over to sweet life.
Podcast dot com forward slash 170 So it’s 1 70 It’s episode number 1 70 Yanda Again in the community By connecting with us.
It’s sweet life community dot com. Thanks, sir. I appreciate it. Thanks, April.
That’s all folks!

Episode 165: How To Grow Your Business With Pinterest – With April Beach and Melanie Fountain

Melanie Fountain SweetLife Entrepreneur April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Who This Episode is Great For:

  1. Those in any phase of my Lifestyle Entrepreneur System
  2. Those who have used Pinterest for their business yet and are interested in getting started

Show Highlights:

  • Pinterest expert, Melanie Fountain, will help you understand the basics of what you should be doing every single day and week on Pinterest
  • Why Pinterest is so powerful; especially when compared to social media platforms
  • How you can get started with your very own Pinterest marketing plan today

Take Action with Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Facebook Community 

Resources Mentioned:

Melanie Fountain’s Website

Melanie Fountain on Pinterest

Melanie Fountain’s Facebook Group | Pinterest for Bloggers and Content Creators

Schedule Your FREE Strategy Call with Melanie Fountain

Canva

Tailwind

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast on Pinterest

April Beach on Facebook

April Beach on Instagram 

Full Show Transcript:

 

you’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probe Age Hi, everyone, Thanks so much for tuning in with me again for another week. Here on the suite Life podcast It’s good to talk to you and connect again, and today we’re diving Maur into online marketing strategies. Last week on the show, I talked to those of you guys who have been doing a lot of work. Maybe you’re spending a lot of time on instagram or on Facebook or even on LinkedIn,
and your numbers just aren’t growing. And we dove into some really authentic marketing strategies that have worked for years and are important to keep integrating into your business to grow your following. Today we’re diving back into some of the online marketing strategies because, as a business owner in today’s day and age were all online marketers. And so it is important that we’re always continuing too deep in our online marketing skills, and so I am thrilled to be joined by a Pinterest business building expert on today’s show. Now I’ll be honest with you.
I’m not a Pinterest person. I don’t cook, so I usually tell Go after recipes. I do love looking at Pinterest for design and in home needs, but it’s not something I do on a regular basis, maybe like five times a year, So I don’t even think that actually counts at all. But we do is a business, have a Pinterest account and it always shocks me. When I go over to our Pinterest account and I see how many followers we have or how many people are noticing the content,
I often think to myself, Wow, this is a really engaged platform. I should be here more, but the truth is, we haven’t as a company. It wasn’t something that we had had on our marketing strategy and plan. And so I have the privilege of interviewing today’s guest. After this interview, I asked our guest who was amazing to sit down with myself and Kelly, who is my content quarterback for the content for the show, and we started diving into our pincher strategy, and I will tell you,
with only one week of doing the strategy that you’re gonna learn here on this show, are Pinterest percentage has risen by something crazy like 1900% engagement. It was insane. The numbers from one week of doing What Today’s guest taught us how to d’oh from today’s show. So I’m so excited to introduce you and share of these strategies with you. So today’s podcast is for those of you guys who are in any phase of my lifestyle entrepreneur business building system. But if you have not used Pinterest before and you want to try that strategy so it doesn’t matter where you are in your business building if you haven’t built your business yet or if you’re an established scaled multi six figure company and you want to use Pinterest,
this show is for you as well. This show also is going to help you understand the basics of what you should be doing every single day, every single week on Pinterest. How Pinterest works, why Pinterest is powerful, especially when you compare it to other social media handles in the S e o aspects of Pinterest and how you can get started on your very own Pinterest marketing plan today. You’re gonna leave with all of those answers after this show If you’re busy and you can’t take notes of what we’re talking about,
you can find all the show notes over its sweet life. Podcast dot com forward slash 1 65 All right. You guys were here with Melanie Fountain, and she is a Pinterest guru. We’ve been wanting to bring interest experts on the show because you guys are asking for it. We as a company, we want to know more about growing and connection with our listener to followers rip interest. So I’m super stoked about this show. We’re talking about everything interests who should be on Pinterest, how to activate your business and Pinterest.
You know how to grow your list through Pinterest how to get started software scheduling all of the I would save basics. But I’ve been through, you know, we’ve been through this outline of what we’re gonna talk about before, and it is foundational information, but really, really powerful. So I’m very excited to have Melanie on the show. Please introduce yourself and let everybody know who you are. Hi, everybody. I’m so excited to be on here today. Thank you, April for having me. My name is Melanie Fountain.
I am a blogger and Pinterest strategist. So I work with bloggers, content creators and business owners that want to get their contents scene without paying ah ton of money on ads or having to worry so much about website S E 02 ranking Google and that heavy competition. And we strategize based on their content. And really, it’s kind of let the little guy be seen. And it’s possible to market yourself without paying a lot of money and add. I love it. Okay. And how long have you been doing this?
And what’s your history? How did you get end to doing this? I love hearing everybody’s stories, and I know a lot of our listeners resonate with our guest stories. So tell us just really quickly some background of how you started doing this. Sure. Well, you know what? This month is my year anniversary of really calling myself an entrepreneur. And I started as a virtual assistant, so as a general virtual assistant, just wanting to get out of the regular 9 to 5. I’m a single mom and I live in California,
and I really wanted to, you know, you feel like you’re missing out on life when you’re working your life away for a company. But you know, you’re really not going to grow in. So I decided to sign up for a virtual assistant course, and then it kind of went like wildfire from there, and I fell in love with Pin Trust and the visual side event. But then the you know, the strategy behind it, the marketing and I started working with business owners and found that I actually had a talent in it.
And so I actually started as a Pinterest strategist about nine months ago now. But since then I’ve been able to work with over a dozen business owners, helping them grow Pinterest and strategize. And in May of 2019 I was able to quit my job. And so I’ve been working for myself for the last nine months. Net war Basically, since I transitioned over to nation down into Pinterest marketing and here we are that’s such on the awesome story.
Oh, my gosh, that’s a chance. My story and that story alone like, forget we’re gonna talk about pictures today.
That story alone, a lot of our listeners are like I can’t wait to be there and that’s what I’m working towards.
And so it’s really cool, especially in such a short period of time hearing those awesome results, and I will just kind of add in there.
The reason why Melanie probably had such amazing results is because she needs down like she is that pinchers expert.
If she was like I’m the V eight, all people in all things, I can guarantee you her business wouldn’t be where it is today.
So we talk about Nietzschean a lot on this podcast. She is a perfect example. That’s so I’m super excited that you’re on the show today,
So we’re gonna talk about Pinterest everything. First of all, give us some background about Pinterest. What,
actually is it cause it’s not a social media platform? Right, Right? Exactly. So Pinterest is commonly known as a social media platform,
but what it actually is is a search engine. It’s a visual Google, and more than that, it’s a discovery engine.
When people go on Pinterest, they want to be inspired. They want to discover they want to learn,
but they don’t always know what it is exactly. They’re searching for soap. Interest is there for people to discover what it is they’re searching for.
And a lot of the time from a business perspective. They’re there to discover you were there to discover your business and the value that you have to provide.
And Pinterest has over 300 million active people monthly on Pinterest, searching for businesses like the businesses that listen to this podcast.
That’s crazy. That’s somebody over multi 1,000,000,000 searches every month. And and that’s why I’m a little bit we’re gonna talk about s CEO and how to be found on pin trust,
of course, but it’s such a powerful platform. And on Lee now, are people really starting to discover the power of interest?
That’s so cool. Okay, so one of our listeners, you know, she’ll be out there saying,
Okay, that’s cool. But I’m on all these other social media platforms and you know, I’m strapped for time,
So just reiterating what you just said. It is a surgeon, Jen. It is searchable by Google,
and it’s actually on Lee search engine that we know of today that actually is searchable by Google. Is that correct?
YouTube is as well, but that’s right. Yeah, So there’s YouTube Interesting Google and those are the big guys when they have to search engine.
And that’s the funny thing. And I’m glad that you mentioned that April because when you’re searching something in Google,
a lot of the articles and images that come up are also on Pinterest. So when you’re on Pinterest,
you’re kind of killing two birds with one stone, right? Yeah, you’re definitely increasing CEO getting to page one and all that stuff.
You were gonna talk about that? Okay, so who should be on Pinterest? If you are creating consistent content,
you should be on Pinterest and it’s really a simple is that you don’t have to have a blawg. You know it’s helpful.
Absolutely. But if you’re a podcaster, if you create videos if you write article, you know, if you’re creating content,
Pinterest is where you should be. Okay, awesome and some things like Okay, cool. How do I get started?
I talked to people about the different stream like a business account and a regular account is Pinterest have both different types of accounts.
So when you when you sign on to Pinterest is a user, when you create an account most of the time you’re creating a personal account.
The difference between creating a personal account in the business account. When you have a business account, you will lock features like analytics.
You can track the performance of pans you contract clicks to your website. You can leak Pinterest to your website to enable rich pins,
which basically pulls the metadata and on the S E o from your website, making your pants more likely to be seen super cool.
Okay, so is it still one account? So you sign up. Is that personal? And then you upgrade to business or they to separate accounts to usually recommend people have.
It depends, so you could do both. As a personal account. You could convert and make some of your more personal boards secret or if you’re a blogger,
and if your lifestyle blogger and a lot of your boards are already relevant to your ideal audience, then you can keep those boards.
But sometimes I could recommend if you have ah, 100 boards random, completely unrelated to your business, it might be better to create a whole new account altogether.
Okay, Super interesting. All right. And then how does somebody get started setting up their account. It’s freeze.
So if you want to get started on Pinterest, you sign up for your business account. Oh, you know,
if you have a website you put in your domain, you make sure that you clean your social media accounts and then when you’re really got me started on,
Pinterest is all about content and, you know, scheduling to different board. So I have a 10 10 rules.
So you want to start with 10 templates, I recommend Camba. It’s free to start, and they have a really good monthly program with all these stock photos,
and they have a lot of Pinterest template to. So if you’re not a graphic designer and that’s not your,
that’s not your thing. Campbell has a lot of free templates. Create 10 of them and then you can just kind of plug and play.
I recommend about Reed of four pins for a piece of content, and if you have a lot of content,
but you’re just getting started on Pinterest, just pick may be the last five pieces of content blowing post podcast and then create four or five pens for each of those,
and then you could eventually work backwards if you want to do that and then use those 10 templates and then schedule them to 10 relevant board.
So when you’re creating boards, I recommend having, like, a best of board of your business. So on Lee,
your content goes in that board. And then if you’re a blogger having your content with all of your blonde post and one or a podcaster,
whatever your content, maybe and then beyond that have really generally named boards. So that way, when you’re scheduling content,
we’ll get to schedule that you just a little bit. But when you’re scheduling to those boards, you can pretty much set your Pinterest on autopilot.
So you know, if you can’t afford to have somebody managing. But you kind of, you know,
with Pinterest, I’ll get more into this, but you want to schedule at least 8 to 10 times per day.
Oh, my gosh. Okay, let me ask you some questions. One of the things that you said Waas and I want to make sure our listeners you’re hearing this.
So for every piece of content, you want to create three separate kin’s three separate posts from that content.
This is great content repurpose ing strategy, a love that you said that. So for every piece of content you guys create,
whether it is an article that you’ve written on your website or if it doesn’t matter where you want to send them,
you could somebody actually an article he wrote on somebody else’s website to establish you as an expert or if you’re a guest on somebody’s podcasts and them two that podcast,
whatever it is. But for every piece of content you recommend three different posts, and then you recommend 10 different templates to choose those three different posts from so 10 templates that you creating Can va there,
there and all you have to do is plug and play a different title plug and play different image in there.
We heard that. Christ, Lee. Yes. Okay, all right. And then Pinterest for those of our listeners that haven’t been on there yet,
has boards. And you can place your own content, your boards, you can pin somebody else’s content to your board.
And so what you’re saying is, and I love this this is really great. So a lot of our listeners are in the phase of actually scaling their business where they’ve been in business for a long time.
And they do have a lot of content, whether they’re podcasters or bloggers or just straight content creators and other capacities.
So in love, the best of board, so the best of board totally cool. And you’re also recommending those people that are bloggers have a board to put their block post to have or their articles?
Would you recommend any other kind of creative boards like we? D’oh! We like to do a lot of promotion of our clients and of our podcast listeners.
So would you recommend, For example, we had a sweet life entrepreneur, a podcast like featured listener board where we could send linked to our favorite and greatest listeners.
You know, would that be something that you’d recommend as well, even though it doesn’t actually promote our company?
But it would make other people realize what we’re about? Are those type of things beneficial as well on Pinterest?
Absolutely. You could do, you know, and I love my client’s board and share your client’s content.
You can you know your podcast episodes. If you’re somebody that creates AA lot of freebies and you have a resource library.
You can have a board just on sweet life. Entrepreneur freebies. Wait. Have 100 and 57 of them.
Okay, well, you know what? There’s 400 pins, you know? Go. Yeah, and I love how you said repurposing content because that’s exactly what it is.
It doesn’t have to be hard. It’s a long I’m talking and all of you are probably thinking, Oh,
my gosh, this is overwhelming. But it’s really just taking the content you already have and putting it out there for the world to see.
I love it. Okay, so now let’s go back to my short little heart attack when you said eight times today posting.
So let’s talk about posting frequency. What is that like, How often are people on Pinterest? So,
for example, when we look at it another social platform, even though we’re trying to say that Pinterest isn’t one of them,
but another platform where you can put content like Lincoln, for example, the average person only goes toe linked in twice a month.
Okay, so every single different outlet has a different frequency. Talk to me about Penn dresses, Pinterest frequency.
Why? Eight times a day. It’s all about S E O. It’s about also staying relevant because you have,
ah 100 million you active users every month. Ah, good portion of that. Our business owners putting up their content constantly,
and it’s also about staying on top of the feeds you want to be. You know, it is search engine optimization,
so the more frequently you post they could be anywhere from eight times a day to 50 times a day.
And that’s why it’s really important to have a good scheduling tool. The reason why you do that also is to continue to be able to share your content.
Work frequently because you can share one pin once a day. But if you’re on Lee sharing that pin,
then you can only really share that every selected because your feet is just going to be like, Hey,
look at me, look at me. So that’s why you want so many different pens. And once you get in a rhythm of scheduling them out,
it’s not so overwhelming. So you know, at first, you know, getting everything set up is time consuming.
But once you get everything set up and automated in a loop in in a schedule that eight times a day will quickly increase to kind of get your get your content more likely to be seen.
Okay, a ball questions number one. Can you on Pinterest re share the same pin over and over again?
Or would that just be repenting the same pin to a board? Or is it actually fresh brand new pieces of content that should be released eight times a day?
You can repent the same pin every day, but two different boards. That’s why you want to start with 10 boards and continue to grow off of that.
So at it, it’s more important tohave more boards than it is to have a lot of pins and a few boards.
So that’s why I think it’s very important to have general board. So when you have one pin, let’s say you’re a travel blogger or something,
and you have aboard all about trouble and then international travel and traveling abroad and their own really general terms.
But then, if you have something about traveling to bully, you can schedule that panto all of those boards once a day,
and then it can Luke back. But then you throw in some war of your content and then that schedules to different boards.
And it’s a snowball effect because, like Google, Pinterest does take some time to recognize who you are for your account to catch up to the algorithm.
So it could take 3 to 6 months to really start saying traffic, go to your website. But by that time you will have all of the content you need to be seen on Pinterest and start getting that traffic it builds on.
It felt awesome. Okay, so let me ask you one more question about that, just to make sure I’m fully understanding.
And so when you say posting eight times a day, it still could be individual pieces of content, your meaning,
like eight times a day. You should have something landing on a different board, absolutely. And if it’s your content,
as long as it’s a different pain than it could be to the same board, you just don’t want the same pin landing in the same board eight times a day.
And if I say you’re scheduling eight times a day, it could be what, especially when you’re first starting out.
It could be six of your pans and two of somebody else’s, too, because Pinterest favors people that share other people’s content at the It’s a shared platform,
and they want to make sure to that you’re not just hearing your content and that’s how you get re pins and you’re content shared as well.
Okay, cool. Thank you for clarifying that. Love that. So you can actually grab somebody else’s pin and put it in your scheduler.
Talk a little bit about you mentioned at a scheduling tool software tool while we’re on scheduling, you know,
before we started recording that you really like to use. So my favorite and they’re partnered with Pinterest is Tailwind.
You could integrate till one with penne trust, and there’s also different analytical tools that sync up with that.
You can sink it with Google Analytics, and you could basically see all of your pants and a big schedule.
So for those of you that use Instagram scheduler like plan early or something, you could see you’re a good kind of planned out and grades aren’t so important and Pinterest,
but you can school through and see. OK, how far my planned out do I have any duplicate pans like right back to back to back and then also with until when there’s something called tribes and they’re basically like Facebook groups four Tailwind or perp in trust,
and you shared your content there. And when you drawing to TRIBE, if you share something, you also have to repent something else.
So when you share to those tribes, people are almost required to share your content as well. So there’s different sharing analytical features,
and there’s something entailing called Smart Loop. So but Tillman has a free plan for up to 30 pay,
or up to 100 pens a month. But if you’re going to invest in something with Pinterest, I would recommend upgrading that because then you pretty much get unlimited pins per month,
and then they also have Smart loop feature, so you can basically set your your pants and a smart loop,
and it will schedule to your boards for you. And that’s why I recommend having general boards so that you can set up.
You’re scheduling on automation and have your pins circulate to those general boards without having pains go to Pier 11 boards.
That that makes sense. Yeah, it does make sense. Okay, I have questions about the type of content.
Question number one is how much content shows below the pin before it’s like a remora or linked to this site button about how much text copy is usually seen.
And how important is that content and copy in addition to the graphic pen. So the pen description is really important when it comes to the S e O.
Now you really only get about. I think it’s 250 characters that you get and in that and you kind of want you want to give a description with enough C words in there with maybe 2 to 3 hashtags,
you know, up branded one and some general ones know usually with instagram those hash times a really neat show with Pinterest.
You want them to be very general, and then you kind of want to call the action. You know,
you don’t have to have the link, but you want something like, you know, for more tips and tricks.
Visit my website, read my blog’s, but you don’t want anything like Click cheered. You know, by this,
because then you might get registered as Clickbait or spam. So you want to be very careful and Pinterest uses its own S C O.
So when you’re looking for key words for your pin descriptions, you want to use the search bar and Pinterest to find the key words you’re going to use to describe your content.
Oh, fascinating, Yes, totally a different strategy than we see on Instagram and those other places. Okay,
so this is where the search ability comes in is actually the copy underneath the pen because you can’t read copy from a graphic.
Super curious about that in Pedro’s does use Hashtags, so that’s just fascinating. This well, in the different hashtag strategies they aren’t is nish.
I think that’s fascinating. Okay, uh, let’s talk about video a little bit. Okay? Interest actually allows video.
What kind of video does Pinterest like in a wow? So unlike most of the platforms, Pinterest is vertical with video pens.
You see vertical pens or square almost like Instagram because there’s a really great instagram sharing capability to Pinterest now,
and that’s just developing just like the video pins. So it’s a relatively new feature. It’s in beta testing for scheduling per tail.
It and it’s really new. And it’s really exciting because with how visual Pinterest is, introducing video into that is going to be really,
really great for businesses to give a snapshot into their business without having to just create a graphic. And the videos and Pinterest are generally 20 seconds or less because you have a feed of all of these pans and because not many people are making video right now,
when you’re on your phone, when you’re scrolling through Pinterest, the videos are automatically playing, so they’ll catch your attention quicker.
So that’s why it’s so powerful to do it. And you could do something like a goby spark people.
You can use a snippet from your YouTube videos. You can get really, really creative when it comes to your video pins,
and it’s so new that people are just still developing the strategies for it. People use them a lot for Pinterest ads,
so Pinterest does have add capabilities. You know, a lot of people don’t ever use ads, but primarily they were used for ad,
and now you can use them just for organic reach. Supercool. Okay, what else should I be asking you that I didn’t ask you for those of our listeners that are interested in getting started to create more visibility with interest.
So when it comes to pen Trust s CEO is key because it is a search and we’ve kind of touched on it during this.
But I just want to make sure that if you’re going to go on Pinterest and you’re going to start implementing this as a strategy for marketing,
which I highly recommend for any content creators in any regard. But optimize your Pinterest description with keywords and give called actions your board’s make sure that you have each of your boards categorize and described with S E O using the S E o from Pinterest giving called actions to your websites because a lot of the time people get the board recommendations more than profile recommendations,
so they may land on your board before they ever land in your profile. So you want to make sure that you have a called action so they know you’re a business that you mean business and that you have awesome content to provide so and then the pen description.
Something s e o is key. If you’re gonna learn anything about Pinterest. Make sure that you know how to use keywords.
Awesome! Oh, my gosh. I have so much I want to talk to my team about right now that I just can’t wait to get off this interview and turn all this over to them.
Thank you so much for your time. Melanie, This was exciting. I love this. I love this show.
Led this interview. How can people find you so I actually have a free pace. But group where I go with a live weekly and interested Tuesday is that I just had one this morning and I share with the groom have use Pinterest Ansel content ideas.
I also offer free strategy calls for business owners that want some one on one. Just kind of wanna get pointed in the right direction.
And April I will give you my social media links so people can stay connected and I give a lot of probably way more pitch free paint.
Could trust advice that I said I love it. I love it. I love Yeah. We’ll make sure all the links to find you are in the show notes for this episode.
Thank you so much for your time. Melanie. I learned a lot today. I appreciate it. Thank you so much,
April. All right, you guys, that’s a wrap. Thank you so much for tuning into the show today for all the show notes.
And the resource is how to connect with Melanie Moore and how to get literally tons of free resource is to grow your business.
If you haven’t been to our podcast website lately, it’s pretty incredible. You can actually sort all of our shows by what you’re looking for,
whether it’s marketing. Brandon copyrighting online courses Landing your first client Every single thing you need. There are years and years of free resource is there,
so please use that website over at sweet life podcast dot com. And before we go, I want to make sure I’m giving a shout out to this week’s sweet life podcast Superfan.
This is 311 solution. You confined them by visiting 311 solution. C b d dot com there. Empowering healthier lifestyles.
Effective C B D supplements from lab tested hemp life in balance. And Shelly is one of our biggest fans of my Facebook page,
and she is always working hard to build her business, working hard to bring a quality product to market.
I know that based on the the D EMS that she sends me and she tunes in here to the sweet life podcast.
And so we wanted to give her a shout out. Shelly, thank you so much for listening to the show.
Thank you for being a super fan of this show and really creating an awesome, brisk business bringing amazing products to the people that need them.
So go over and give Shelly a shout out at 311 solution CBD. She also could be found on Instagram at 311 solution CBD and on Facebook at 311 solution.
All right, you guys have an awesome day. I’ll talk to you soon.
That’s all folks!

Episode 164: Is Your Online Marketing Failing? Here are 5 Solutions You Can Count On – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Who This Episode is Great For:

  1. Those of you who are doing everything you’re told and your online marketing still isn’t working
  2. Anyone in any phase of my Lifestyle Business Roadmap

Show Highlights:

  • How online marketing sales have changed over the past few years
  • The story of how Facebook completely stonewalled my recent marketing efforts
  • The five strategies you can implement to continue to grow your list and business and increase your sales when all else fails

Take Action with Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Facebook Community

Resources Mentioned:

My Business Website

Want to become an Affiliate of our company? Email hello@sweetlifeco.com

Speakers Summit Mastermind™

Help a Report Out (HARO)

Kristen Foust on Instagram

Every Day I’m Preppin’

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 133: The Power Of Superfans: How to Create A Community Of Superfans Who Love And Follow You Forever – with Pat Flynn

April Beach on Instagram

Full Show Transcript:

 

you’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probe age. You guys coming to you from a very cold boulder, Colorado. I’m holding my cup of tea recording this episode for you and I’m hoping that my voice holds out. I have the whole Debra Winger thing going on here, but don’t quite sound as sexy as she does. And I have a very special message that I want to share. This is actually one that I fit into our podcast content editorial calendar because of the fact that it’s come up so much,
I think it’s really important for us to talk about today. We are talking about what to do when everything that you’ve been told to dio to market your business online is totally failing. So this means the Facebook ads, the instagram, you know, strategies and the filters and that perfect feeds and a certain number of stories you post each day and how to go live on LinkedIn. All the things you’ve been told or what you quote unquote are supposed to do to grow your business and grow your list. What do you do when they aren’t working?
This is something that we’re hearing more and more about. So the funnels that we had used and that had worked so well to grow lists from 2015 to 2018 they aren’t working so hot anymore until the online strategies of business development aren’t working for everybody the way that they used Thio. And I want to talk about that because I’m a business coach. I coach you guys and I have a lot of women out there that are doing everything quote unquote right, right. You know, on my team of experts, I have Facebook experts and Instagram experts.
And finally, a couple of weeks ago, we hit a total brick wall within my own business. So I’m gonna tell you this story. And this is why it really triggered me to record this episode for you about two weeks ago when we were going through to trigger our ads to Sweet Life Launch, which is my business launch and development program that was open for a short period of time. All of our ads were stonewalled by Facebook, which means Facebook rejected all of our ads. Now these were the same ads.
We ran over and over again, and we went through the language making sure that language was right. We went through making sure there weren’t any, like, shifty promises and the ads, you know, because Facebook’s always, you know, trying to be careful for what businesses advertise on their platform anyway. Total Stonewall meeting with Facebook’s Our Facebook ads strategist who is a Facebook at expert. She has been for years. She met, looked with Facebook anyway. Our ads were not approved in. Facebook has now been putting a crunch on ad strategies for business coaches,
and we’re starting to feel the effects of some of the online marketing strategies that works really, really well for years and years. What happens is when a lot of people start doing them. They stopped working so well and we hit that brick wall. I know that this is also happening in and many of your businesses to Maybe you’re following an instagram strategy or a social media planning calendar. That somebody you said would be perfect and it’s not working for you. So whether you have your Facebook ads disapproved for literally no reason like we did.
Your funnels aren’t attracting buyers anymore. You’re wasting hours a week on instagram and not gaining any following all. Maybe you host live webinars. Maybe you’re using a live weapon, our strategy to sell into your programs. Maybe that’s just not working. And I’m not saying these aren’t working for everybody is a matter of fact. A client of mine just hosted live Webinars and sold her online course for $40,000 for the first launch. I mean, some of these strategies are working great, but for many of you, they aren’t.
So this is the podcast to be listening to If everything that everybody said to d’oh you have done and your list still isn’t growing, your business isn’t booming. You aren’t gaining your followers today.
We’re gonna talk about how to market your business when all else fails. So this particular episode is for those of you guys who are in all phases of my lifestyle entrepreneur road map.
If you aren’t sure where you are, just pause this episode really quick in just text to the number 31996 and you’re gonna wanna text to the word sweet life one word and that I’ll just shoot you a link.
You can take a small short assessment, and it’ll tell you exactly where you are on the road map to build the lifestyle business of your dreams and give you steps and thinks you should be working on based on where you are.
So this particular episode, this online marketing kind of fail. This is not just for new entrepreneurs. This is affecting established businesses,
too. So this particular episode is for every single phase of my lifestyle. Entrepreneur of my lifestyle, business,
road map. And today we’re gonna talk about five different strategies that you can d’oh to continue to grow your list and grow your business and increase your sales when all else fails.
All the show notes for this episode can be found it. Sweet life podcast dot com forward slash 1 64 and stick around to the end of this episode.
We are featuring a podcast listener and their business every single week in promoting you guys out on instagram and on Facebook and helping your business gain more traction and get more attention to so stick around at the end of the show,
and you will get to know our featured listener and for you to be our featured listener. Simply go to sweet life podcast dot com and applied to be the next featured business and listener.
Okay, let’s go ahead and dive in. Okay, Step number one. The first thing to do when all of your online marketing fails.
The first thing to do is to create a network of online businesses just like yours. That you resonate with you are,
may be in the same place, is they are in their business, and I want you to create personal relationships with them.
Here is the purpose of doing this when you create a collective of businesses that don’t do the same thing.
Just a collective of like minded women in a small group, not 20 not 30 were like talking five or seven,
and you create this collective of businesses that you take the time to get to know each other. You take the time to get to know the service’s of one another.
You actually go through almost like a mini brand training with each other, and you create this collective of promoting each other’s businesses connecting with each other online and offline.
That is gold to your company. So here’s your homework for this. This is picking five people from online.
I want you to pick five different businesses online. You can connect with them from Facebook groups that you’re in.
As long as that, of course, abide by those group rules. You can connect with him on Instagram,
and I want you to reach out to all of them individually at first and just say this. Say,
Hey, listen, I’m working hard to get my business noticed. I see you’re working hard to get your business noticed us?
Well, I’d love to get to know you create a relationship with you. Hey, let’s have coffee sometime and you get to know them.
You get to know what they’re doing. This takes time. Folks like there is no press easy button here.
And that’s the downfall of online marketing. Is it? For so many years, you’ve been told that this is an easy button with online marketing that you could just hit,
and all these people are just going to show up at your front doorstep. It doesn’t always work that way,
and it’s starting to work that way less unless, Okay, so taking time to have coffee with another business virtually online,
even just for 15 minutes and getting to know each other is a powerful first step. My recommendation is to do this with five different businesses individually,
and then set up a zoom virtual coffee date with these five ladies once a month. It’s like your own little mini mastermind,
and what happens is you become part of each other’s lives and you know about each other’s businesses in those relationships grow and you’ll start commenting on their things on social media,
and they’ll start commenting on yours. They’ll refer other people to your business, and vice versa. That is number one.
Best way is to create a community. Collective was just you and a few other girls Where you connect with these relationships are the ones that build profitable,
powerful, multi six figure cos they start like this. They start by a hanging out and having coffee together,
being intentional. So that is step number one Stuff member. Choose to be common affiliate be becoming an affiliate means that your company sells another company’s program,
service’s or products. This is a really great way to number one, have your business seen as a leader and a somebody that sells really resourceful products,
even if they aren’t your own number two. To be able to build a relationship with other businesses by supporting them to sell their programs and offers and number three by increasing your sales when you become an affiliate,
you automatically are brought into a collective of other affiliates that air promoting the same program the same offer. This is an amazing way to network to share what you do and,
of course, to make more online friends when you make more online friends and you have more people on your side where people are going to share your business and recommend you that other people,
these personal relationships supersede anything that you can d’oh even any video strategy that you could do and just put out there to a cold audience.
Having somebody personally recommend you will always come first. Now the question is, you ask, how do I become an affiliate now?
This isn’t a whole training on how to become an affiliate for somebody else, but let’s just cut to the chase.
If you see a program that you like and you’d like to sell, reach out to the person personally in just a Hey,
listen, I love what you’re doing. I believe in what you’re doing. Can I help you sell it?
Can I be an affiliate? One of my favorite programs that I sell for somebody else’s for my friends.
Selena Sue. She has a program called Impacting Millions. It teaches people how to get press and how to get media exposure in your business,
and I love this program. I’ve been affiliate for her for years now, and the way I did that was reaching out to her and say,
Hey, I love what you’re doing. This is not something I currently coach my clients on. I would love to sell yours.
How can I help you? How can I be of service to you? And being part of Selena’s affiliate program has actually introduced me to some of my very best online business Girlfriends is a matter of fact two of them.
I just hosted a virtual weekend summit with These are great relationships, and what it’s gonna do is it’s gonna open the doors from our networking for you,
but it’s also going to increase your sales and get your company more exposure. So that is step number 27 of our three is did speak.
I’ve been talking about speaking here on this podcast. This is really important for you getting up personally in front of an audience in actually speaking to them,
teaching a training or sharing your message. It doesn’t matter if it’s 10 people or 100 people or 1000 people.
When you do that, you connect one on one with that listener in a way that you can’t any other way through online marketing.
And so I encourage you to speak to get out there. And your action item on this is just to make a list of five different events that you would like to speak at this year.
Five different places. They’re your wish list of events. Where do you want to talk? Is there a woman Start up summit or Health and Fitness Summit and go and start doing your research.
Figure out how you can apply for that and start getting your ducks in a row to do that. We talk all the time here on this podcast and that actual summit that I hosted with to my Only Girlfriends was called Speaker Summit That teaches you how to have resource is to book yourself to speak so you can always cruise back to sweet life co dot com.
My Web site and find resource is to learn how to speak their a swell. But your action item on this is just to make a list of five different dream stages that you would like to speak on.
They don’t have to be big. The small ones in the local communities in your small towns are the ones that build almost just is powerful relationships,
as if you’re a big keynote speaker for an annual event. So Number four is to get press and media attention.
Now. Press and media attention doesn’t automatically create a marketing funnel for you. However, when you get press and media attention,
what it does is it attracts high quality businesses and high quality buyers to you. This is an alternative to our traditional online marketing standards that we’ve been talking about because it’s a way that immediately elevates you as an expert.
Whether you’re contributing to an article whether you’re quoted in the magazine, whatever it may be getting press and media attention for your business will always supersede your authority above any sort of personal self posting you’re doing across social media.
It’s having an endorsement from a media outlets saying, Hey, look, this chick knows when she’s talking about,
and we’re gonna quote her in this article because we think she’s a reputable source. So having that sort of exposure is going to attract other businesses to you,
and it’s going to then attract marketing to you. So it’s one of those things that you can do that’s free.
You don’t have to pay for it other than sweat equity to submit your article to be featured in a publication.
And one of the resource is we’ve shared here for the last couple of years on this podcast on how to get awesome Press and media attention is a resource called Help a Reporter out.
It’s a free resource where you can submit yourself as an expert and we’ll go ahead and make sure we put a link to help a reporter out,
also known as Harrow in the show notes for this episode for You and then the fifth strategy to grow your business,
aside from online marketing, is to host offline events. This could be a meet up, but you d’oh!
It could be a luncheon for local businesses in your area. There doesn’t have to be a cost to it.
It’s just hosting an event to bring people closer to you within your community that are your perspective clients. Even if you have an online business,
it’s important to know that the best, most lucrative relationships are built face to face. So those followers those super fans is Pat.
Fling calls them those first followers of a new service or a new offer. You can get those source first followers locally,
and then they become your biggest online cheerleaders. They become your biggest fans. I still remember when I was launching this podcast and we had a big,
huge podcast launch team that was so grateful for all of the women, all the people that took part in it.
But the majority of listeners on that podcast launch team. We’re from Colorado. They were friends and friends of friends,
and it was really awesome. There were hundreds of people that flooded the airwaves sharing this podcast, but that started local and it catapulted us to the top female entrepreneur podcast for over 20 weeks straight.
So I want you to know that those things work. Don’t just cut to the chase and go immediately to these online relationships.
And if you find yourself where you’re wondering, why isn’t this working? What is wrong with me? I’ve done every single Facebook live video that so and so told me to do,
and I’m showing up on Instagram. Story is the exact amount of time and hosting I G lives in posting interesting,
thought provoking articles that start with stories on LinkedIn and nothing is working. The most important thing to do is keep it up.
Don’t quit doing those things. Your online presence is incredibly important. I’m not saying that you should quit those things.
What I am telling you is that there are other ways to grow your business through what we call grassroots marketing that are going to build deep relationships with people that I love you and become your greatest cheerleaders.
And they aren’t always this shiny, perfect online funnel like you’re told that they are until this podcast is to let you know there’s nothing wrong with you.
You’re not doing anything wrong. You’re trying hard, you’re building your business and you’re trying to get attention into spread out and to rise above the noise.
And I love you for that. And that’s so awesome. That’s why you’re sitting here listening to this podcast episode.
But these five ways. If you just pick a couple of them, even two of these to incorporate in your marketing strategy,
I promise you they will make a world of difference. They’re not an easy but you do not get to push a button,
and these things were being instantly done for you. These things take work, but because they take work,
an intention and personal connection, that’s why they’re so powerful and they can grow your business in exponential ways.
So let’s go back over these five solutions when all of your online marketing his head a brick wall number one is defined.
Five people online from Facebook groups, or INSTAGRAM, schedule coffee dates with them, inform a little mastermind collective,
get to know each other and support each other in each other’s business is Number two is to become an affiliate in to sell somebody else’s service.
Is you can always email us if you’d like to be humming affiliate of our business programs. Simply shoot an email toe Hello at sweet life co dot com and say,
I want to be an affiliate. We would love to have you, and I know there are many other businesses out there that would love to have you sharing their offers.
And service is number three is speak. What I talked about on today’s show is really to speak. Live face to face events.
Start booking yourself on five stages, whether their local or bigger, buying five stages this year. Get out their share your message and connect with people.
Face to Face Number four is to get press and media attention, and I promised you will put the link to the heros so that you can submit yourself as an expert in the show notes for this episode.
And Number five is to host offline events hosting offline events. Coffee dates face to face strategy sessions. Maybe you host a community event where you pour into your community and you volunteer your service.
Is that you? D’oh for another group of women once every quarter. Believe me, that will give you strides of an advantage over your competitors by giving first,
we really believe that the best way to build your business is always by giving first, and that is one key way to do it.
All right, you guys help. You found this podcast helpful. If you did, I would love it.
I would really appreciate it if you’d just up arrow and sure this podcast with your friends. You can actually share this podcast directly from Spotify and Pandora to instagram.
And if you aren’t yet, please follow us at Sweet Life Podcast or at sweet Life Entrepreneur on Instagram.
I would love to chat with you over there. Okay, Your show notes for this episode can be found by visiting Suite Life podcast dot com forward slash 1 64 in today’s feature podcast Listener is Kristen Fast.
Kristen is the founder of Everyday I’m prep in dot com. She is a health coach that helps Mama’s ditch the fad diets and take control of their help,
including hormone mindset. And she just has some really cool stuff. Follow her over on Instagram at Kristen G.
Faust, and every day I’m prepping. She adjusted a really cool I g TV video, which I love about weight loss,
ms. So let’s give her a high five and go over and follow her on her business. She’s doing great stuff over there.
We’ll make sure there’s a link to Kristen’s business in the show notes for this episode as well. Okay,
you guys help. You found this helpful. I just want to encourage you that if you feel like you’re doing all the things and nothing’s working,
just keep going. Start using some of these off the side grassroots marketing strategies because these are the ways that we have built business for a long time before anybody invented shiny online funnels.
And let me tell you something. They work, all right, you guys have an awesome week and I’ll talk to you again soon.
Bye for now.

Episode 162: Want To Launch A Podcast? 10 Lessons From Behind The Mic – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Who This Episode is Great For:

  1. If you’re considering launching a podcast.
  2. If you want to be a guest on a podcast and you want to know the inside scoop to increase your chance of landing that guest spot.
  3.  If you’re in the growth and scaling part of your business and you appreciate hearing about times where other women have fallen on their faces and gotten back up again.

Show Highlights:

  • What hosting a podcast hosting is really like.
  • Insights to help you decide if hosting a podcast is a responsibility you want to add to your business.
  • 10 honest lessons you can apply to your business to save time, money, and sanity.

Take Action with Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Facebook Community

Resources Mentioned:

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #65: Doing Things That Don’t Scale – with John Lee Dumas

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #133: The Power Of Superfans: How to Create A Community Of Superfans Who Love And Follow You Forever – with Pat Flynn

April Beach on Instagram

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast on YouTube

 

you’re listening to the sweet life Entrepreneur Podcast Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probe Age, you guys and welcome Thio Podcast number 162 I’m April Beach and I’m so glad that you’re here were actually recording today from Burbank, California This is my very first podcast episode After three years of podcasting, Thio ever record outside of my home studio office. So it’s learning, going through the process and learning here. Sitting at the Burbank Airport Marriott,
my son Jake is in town for three days filming a music video. And it’s just part of the learning process of what we do is Mom’s and as entrepreneurs and just kind of figuring things out as we go. This was more of a last minute trip, and and so it is. It is what it is. And I’m so excited you’ve joined me on today’s show so funny a little bit behind the scenes. We actually spend a lot of time in this hotel. We’re here usually for a couple of weeks a year,
and this is the hotel you guys quiet. Yes, I’m in now. This is the hotel where they have all their producer rooms. So all of the contestants for shows like The Voice and like the new songwriter show they bring them here and they’re walking around with their guitars and you can hear them singing in the hallways. But it’s super hush hush because they’re not allowed to tell you what they’re auditioning for or what show they’re on in. So this is where they bring in, you know, all these singer songwriters to audition and to kind of go through a process of it.
So it’s super cool. So walking around in the lobby, there’s guitars everywhere and groups of people singing. And it’s always the case here at this hotel. So it’s super fun to stay at and just see a little bit, you know, behind the scenes of Hollywood and people are in and out of here all the time. That is not us. You know, nobody’s hounding us to know what we’re doing, but is cool to see honestly, all these kids that are putting themselves out there and just doing their dreams.
So here we are at the Hotel. Today’s show is for those of you guys who are considering launching a podcast, you want to be a guest on another podcast. And you really want to know that inside scoop to increase your chance of landing that dream guest spot today shows also for those of you guys who are in business scaling and growth processes. And you think you love just kind of hearing about how other women fall on their face to make you feel better about the times that you do too, Because guess what we all do.
And I’m gonna be sharing some tough lessons here with you in this episode and some things that I’ve learned along the way both podcasting and through the business of growing a podcast today shows for those of you guys who are also in phases one through five of my lifestyle Entrepreneur road map if you don’t know where you are or if you’ve never taken the quiz to find out where you are in the road map, just simply text to the word sweet life. One word to the number 3196 and will shoot over linked to take a quick quiz so you can get the whole access to the lifestyle Entrepreneur road map in my lifestyle entrepreneur system.
Happy to share that with you. Okay, before we dive into today’s show, we have a special announcement. I know we’ve been talking about it for a couple weeks. This Onley happens a few times a year, but Sweet Life Launch is open. Sweet Life launches my 90 day business launch program with weekly projects that include videos and worksheets to make your business decisions simpler and clear and to help you build your business week by week for 90 days every step of the way. Plus, you get personal coaching for me live business Training’s every single month with advanced business skills teaching you what’s happening.
Always staying on top of the latest trends in technology and marketing and business development and helping you troubleshoot common stuck problems that most women who are launching their business face on top of that sweet life launch. We also have live question and answers in hot seats for every single member. There are a lot of these mass business launch programs out there, and it’s really hard to get attention and to get your specific questions answered so sweet life launches for those of you guys that really want to connect personally and have an opportunity to ask your specific questions instead of throwing them into a baseball group with hundreds or thousands of people and actually have your business have the opportunity every single month to have a hot seat with me so that we can strategize your business development.
On top of this, I have an amazing team of guest advisors and experts and friends that I bring into this community in this month. Inside Sweet Life Launch, Jen Herman, who is an INSTAGRAM marketing expert, is teaching a private live master class too sweet life launch members on Lee. So if you were interested in launching your business, or have you been trying to launch your business and get it off the ground for a long time? Or if you’re interested in launching a business and you’re listening to this show because you’re interested in launching a podcast and you’re wondering how to develop that business in that business model and how it works,
then cruise over to sweet life co dot com forward slash launch because now is your time to get in there is for, goes on Lee open for a short window a few times a year. Okay, so we’re taking care of a little bit of business, making sure you have the business coaching and support that you need when we aren’t listening to this show. Now let’s go ahead and dive more into this show. At the end of this episode, you’ll have more insight on what podcast hosting is like. You’ll be clear.
And if this is a responsibility that you are wanting to add to your business to your weekly or your monthly regimen to your expenses, if that really makes sense for you right now, and you’ll have 10 on his lessons that you can apply to your business across the board to save time, money and sanity. So for all the show notes and everything, but I just mentioned, If you forget it and you’re on the go, you can cruise to sweet life podcast dot com forward slash 162 and everything. I just mentioned the lynx I mentioned,
and the notes from this show will be in there for you. Now let’s go ahead and dive into these 10 lessons, Okay? First things first, all my numbers. Girls out there who loves numbers. Raise your hand. Let’s look at some of the podcasting statistics for 2020. These numbers come from music cunth dot com and I will go ahead and make sure, of course, there’s a link to this infographic and all these numbers for you in the show notes of this episode according to Music Goof,
the top five most popular podcasting categories or genres, our society and culture, business, comedy, news and politics and health.
Now let’s break up some of the numbers a little bit more. 70% of the U. S population are familiar with the term podcasting.
We actually have a lot of people that still have absolutely no clue how to even listen to a podcast.
And so we need to help educate other people on how to find the podcast happen their phone and how they actually consume podcasting information.
If you have a friend that doesn’t listen to podcasts, please take a second and show her on her phone.
How to do it. There are a lot of people didn’t know that there is such a thing as poss casting,
but have zero clue how, actually to consume podcasts just a little f y i If you didn’t realize that 51% of the U.
S population have listened to a podcast, 32% of the U. S population listen to podcasts every single month.
22% listen to podcasts every week. In 6% are avid podcast fans. I really believe we’re going to see that 6% in 2020 be up almost 2 18% which is 18% of the world.
Being an avid podcast fan, if you’re listening to the show thinking about launching a podcast, now’s the time,
girl. You know, this is a crazy exponential growth we’re seeing in the podcasting industry. And let me break up some of the age numbers.
28% of millennials. So 25 to 34 year olds listen to podcasts. 21% of Gen Xers like me That’s up to age 44.
Listen to podcasts. 16% of 45 to 54 year olds. Listen, a podcast, I believe out of those numbers,
we’re going to see a huge rise in the 40 something in the 50 something women consuming podcast, particularly over this year.
We’re already starting to see that, and there’s so many more numbers here on this. Infographic will make sure that there is a link to this for you,
but I just want to mention a few other things. Podcast genders. It’s almost split 50 50 men and women listen to podcasts,
and 45% of podcast listeners have a new income an annual income of greater than $250,000 a year. So as a business coach,
I work with women all the time who are struggling to actually reach an audience it can pay for. Their service is podcasting.
The average listener has a higher education level and makes more money. And so if you have a business that sells a service to people that are have more income and more money,
podcasting could be a really great option for you. But then, let’s also look at the other numbers.
32% of podcast listeners have an annual income of 75,000. So it’s not, you know, obviously, just just the half a millionaire’s that are listening to podcasts.
It’s everyday people that are listening to podcasts, so it’s a really a great clientele, and I just want you to kind of know some of the numbers behind scenes.
So I just wanted to talk about some of the numbers behind the scenes for you first. So if you’re wondering whether or not there’s actually an audience here or you can grow your business,
I will tell you that my business has grown after 22 years of business coaching exponentially since I’ve launched this show because you and I get to connect in a very Rahway that no Facebook marketing,
you know, no static image that’s on Instagram even know video that’s pre recorded that might be on. LinkedIn can connect us away that we’re connecting right now.
So there’s the numbers for all of you numbers, girls. Now let’s go ahead and dive into the 10 lessons I learned from three years of podcasting,
and some of them I learned really fast. Some of them already knew, but they became much more important in order to continually produce a popular podcast show that continues to grow every single week.
And some of them were totally a slap in the face, and I wasn’t expecting so Lesson. Number one was really to know my listeners.
So when I first launched the show, almost all my listeners were in startup. But as the show is grown,
I have listeners that stay and continue to subscribe to the show. And you know your businesses scaling your business is growing.
So I’ve learned that it’s important to break up my episodes. And so you noticed that the beginning of every single one of my shows I’ll tell you what phase of my lifestyle entrepreneur road map that each show applies to.
Well, the phase in the road map applies to where you are in your business, so, like face to is launch phase three and phase for or scale.
I had to figure out a way to categorize what I was teaching on that show so that it hit home for listeners that were in different phases of business.
And it’s really clear in the beginning of each show what actual show is for you, because I don’t want you hanging out here in spending 30 minutes with me when you could be directing that 30 minutes to doing something really productive in your business or creating something that you’ve been waiting to build.
If this show doesn’t apply to you, don’t listen. Turn it off. Come to the next one.
And so it’s one of the things that I had to learn very early on was how to categorize the things I was talking about so that my listeners immediately knew whether or not each show was a good one for them to listen to.
That was a lesson. It probably took me about 20 maybe only 10 episodes, because I had my last entrepreneur a road map for years and years before I launched this show.
But it was very quick when I realized that I want to make sure that each listener knows whether or not that show is right for them.
So if you’re thinking about launching a podcast or even in your business in general, try to figure out a way to kind of classify or categorize those people that listen to your show and help them out ahead of time,
you know, and just say, Hey, listen, this is for you or don’t be afraid to say you know what?
Don’t listen, go do something else. This isn’t for you. So lesson number one is was to learn who my listeners were and to make sure I was disqualifying certain people from listening to each episode just as much as I was pre qualifying others.
It did need to hear it. Lesson number two. I had to learn really quick to be picky about the guests I chose on this show.
This could apply to you if you weren’t a podcaster. Just being picky about the people that you know might contribute to your business or my,
you know, might want to be in a failure partner of yours. I’ve had some not so great guests on the show.
Well, I should say that I’ve recorded. So I’ve recorded shows with guests that seemed super awesome in the application process.
And then he never published shows. And honestly, it’s gonna sound terrible. Any men out there listening?
Sorry, guys. You know I love you. I love guys, but I will tell you it’s primarily the men who were guessed that would come to be a guest on the show.
In all they want to do is sell their shit. So women, we come on podcasts and we wanna contribute and have conversations.
Well, primarily, I can’t say all the men. I’ve had some amazing men who are guests on this show.
The ones I didn’t record and I didn’t publish were guys that came on in. All they wanted to do was pimp their stuff out.
So I have learned to be really, really picky about who speaks for our audience and not to waste my time recording shows that I’m never gonna air.
Now I do a lot of pre screening, so I don’t waste my time. It doesn’t mean I only have women who are guests.
So this is a women’s business podcast. And when you’re launching your podcast or in your business, you know who you serve.
Women want to hear from women, though. So I have had some amazing male guests that I just feel so honored to be on the show.
John Lee do miss who I know has been on the show in path. Flynn has been on the show so many different guys who’ve been on this show,
and I’m very picky, though at this point in time, after three years of podcasting about who I bring in.
So that was lesson number two. Lesson number three was really not to be worried about hurting other people’s feelings.
This actually wasn’t a hard lesson for me. I’m not inherently sensitive person, So being brutally honest about business was totally fine.
However, I know that I’ve lost some listeners because sometimes I come a crime, a Christian that says the effort.
And sometimes I come across and people just don’t really know how to take my personality or my parenting style,
which I share a lot about that on the show, and that’s okay. Not being worried about hurting other people’s feelings was a lesson I really had to learn,
though, because when they initially launched, I wanted everybody to be happy. But when I realized I wasn’t going to make everybody happy,
it actually wasn’t too hard for me to accept that, because that’s just part of life. So lesson number three is don’t worry about hurting other people’s feelings.
Lesson number four is that systems or king. Now this is not a new lesson. We all know this in business.
I can’t remember what I’m doing. Like when I’m walking into the kitchen. My brain is constantly multitasking,
and whether it’s that I’m not taking care of my brain because I’m 43 years old or whether or not I just have too much on my mind.
If I didn’t have systems in place for this podcast, I would be completely lost. And so if you’re thinking about producing content,
whether it’s through a podcast or their weekly video or through you know any other capacity, it is absolutely important that you have systems that you follow to create your content.
Thio Make sure and double check that everything has been created, that it is produced graphically or in what other way,
as faras like sound mixing if you’re in podcasting and that it comes out in a predictable way every single time with checklists everywhere so that no step is missed.
Systems are absolutely king and even more specifically for those of you guys who are wanting to podcast, that’s lesson number four.
Can you guys hear The maid’s with housekeeping is coming down the hall, so let’s see if we can get through this podcast episode together.
Welcome to my mom. Laptop lifestyle dance Mom, Lacrosse Mom working from wherever podcasting life. Okay, Lesson number five.
It’s never gonna be perfect. This one’s hard, and I’ll be honest for you. It’s super hard for me.
I want everything to be the very best it can, but sometimes have had to record shows. And I’m really not ready or I’m sick or I’ve lost my research or I hate the topic or I’m sitting in a dang hotel room and I’m trying to finish recording this episode for you because he’s,
er 10 really great lessons and I want you to have them in Housekeeping is coming down the hall, and I know if I don’t finish recording this thing by the time the kids were done with rehearsal,
that I’m gonna have to pick it back up again two days from now. It’s never gonna be perfect,
You guys, This is par for the course off, being a lifestyle entrepreneur, especially if you have family.
So I had to learn that lesson fast, but it still sucks. I hate that lesson. That’s the worst one of all.
You never get over it, but more that’s more of like something you have to accept. Lesson number five.
Some people flat out won’t like you. I have never been the most popular girl in the room. In fact,
when I was a teen. I was that really bad girl that smoked pot when I was 13 and was doing things I shouldn’t have been doing that other girl’s parents didn’t let them hang out with Still to this day,
people will go up Thio my ex step dad and say, Oh, you’re broken. April’s dad. Yeah,
we weren’t allowed to hang out with them. That’s the kind of the reputation that I always had. And I wasn’t that most popular person and some people won’t like me.
I’m okay with that when it comes to podcasting. You guys, when you go to put yourself out there,
there are people that are not gonna like what you have to say. They’re not gonna like the way you do things.
They’re not gonna like your philosophy. Who gives a shit? You are not doing what you’re doing for those people.
If you’re choosing to put yourself out there in any capacity as a woman and it’s a business leader, you have to be okay with the fact that not everybody’s gonna like you.
On top of that, the women are the worst. They’re the most critical when I say they like you and I aren’t one of them.
It’s the truth, and that culture is starting to change. And we’re seeing a lot more women supporting other women.
But I just want to be really honest with you, especially if you’re watching a podcast or reading a book or speaking on stage is there are some people that aren’t gonna like you,
and you need to be okay with that. You need to love you first in order to get through that.
So lesson number six is some people won’t like you. Lesson number seven is your hardest work pig. Go unnoticed.
This one actually sucks really bad. This is one of those ones, like number five, where not everything is going to be perfect.
Less in number seven, your hardest work may go on notice is when you’ve been working for hours on producing great show.
And if you’re not launching a podcast, this applies to you. If you wrote an amazing article or created a video Siri’s you were really excited about and you put it out there and you work your butt off and you think it’s fantastic in some people won’t even notice that you did it now,
we could take a whole entire episode to talk about the marketing strategy on how to get your hard work noticed.
But I want you to know that sometimes you put things out there and people don’t pick it up the way that you expect.
And you have to be willing to pick yourself up, get past that look at the lessons learned from it,
or maybe just hold it for a little bit. It re release it at another time. So there have been some shows that I have recorded that I’ve put out there and I’m like,
Oh, my gosh, this is it My audience needs is so bad. And the numbers, the downloads don’t reflect how popular I thought that particular show is gonna be.
And that can be frustrating. So just be okay with the fact that sometimes it’s not gonna be noticed.
But you’re all right and keep going along your course. You know, the people that need your content,
it will get to them. Lesson number eight is to trust your team. I am not a natural delegator.
I don’t do well with having a staff and honestly, just keeping it real. Here I really don’t like having to stop and take the time and communicate with people,
even though they work for me and what they’re doing is to help me. It just doesn’t fit into who I am as a person in.
So I’ve had to learn to trust my team. This is a very entrepreneur mentality that I have, and it’s a weakness of mine.
But when it comes to a podcast recording, you have to be able to trust your podcast production team.
You need to be on top of things when they’re due. You need to supply the deliverer bols, whether that is,
you know, design and graphics or research or obviously the audio behind your show, and you have to be ableto have a team in place so that you can produce a great show.
I know very few entrepreneurs that are profitable, successful six plus figure business women that produce their own podcast.
That usually is not the way that it goes. It’s very time consuming and you want to be ableto have the budget to be able to hire out to other people for their area of expertise,
for you to launch your own podcast show. I know that there are so many of you guys out there that want to launch a podcast and you’re willing to do the hard work in the beginning on your own to get it off the ground.
That’s awesome. I love that. I love how scrappy that is. And I love that you are gonna need a podcast production team or a podcast team to distribute your content soon.
So this lesson number eight trust your team is to find a team you love as soon as you can in delegate the heck of your thing.
Hit the heck out of your things to you them so that they can help your show reach more people and higher levels.
Lesson number nine is to plan ahead through this show. It’s really taught me the power of strategic planning when I’m sharing certain content.
So, for example, in this show, you notice in the beginning I was able to share that sweet,
lifelong TRIBE business Launch program is opened If I didn’t plan ahead in my business to know when my coaching programs were opening,
when my retreats were opening, when my master mind was available to apply for that I wouldn’t be able to fit it into the business model and the structure of this show.
So the lesson here is to make money from podcasting. You need to plan ahead so that you know what you’re selling when you’re selling it,
how people have an opportunity to work with you, how to incorporate that into your show, whether it’s self sponsorship of the show or being able to share what you’re selling sporadically throughout the year.
And that comes with the power of planning ahead, both your episodes and how to make money in your business.
How the show’s flow into what it is that you’re offering for your audience. And then the very last lesson is number 10.
Don’t be afraid to sell now. I don’t want this to be a contradiction toe what I said in lesson number two,
Remember when I was talking about a few people who have come on here and all they want to do is sell their stuff to you guys?
That’s not what I’m talking about. When this show first launched back in 2017 I went overboard to never mention any of my programs.
I never told our listeners how they could join my programs, how they could work with me privately. I never did that.
I actually did like the total opposite because the purpose of this show isn’t to sell my business programs. The purpose of this show,
our mission. It is to equip a 1,000,000 women to design their life through entrepreneurship by giving them the springboard and the free tools to do it.
So I did not sell you guys for a really, really long time. I wanted the show to be a love offering,
not a sales pitch. And I hated listening to those podcast where the advertisements would come on, and it would just be trying to sell me stuff.
I wanted to make sure this show is different. So for the entire first year rarely gave people an opportunity to work with me personally.
And then in 2018 a listener wrote to me, asking if there was any way that she could hire me to help grow her business.
I had honestly done such a terrible job of of reverse not selling to my listeners that I was not clear that I’m a business launch coach.
I have been coaching women to design lunch and scale their business for 22 years, and I didn’t make that clear on the show.
And so she wrote just Bagan of those anyway, that she could work with me because the podcast website is a separate website than my business development,
my business coaching website for those of you guys that don’t know that, So when you go to the podcast website,
you don’t see like these big banners to say, Hire a bruise, your business coach That’s not what it’s for.
And so she didn’t know. And I realized at that point in time that I was literally doing my listeners a disservice by not making it clear that I can help them get beyond where they are in their business and take their business to the next level.
Today, I mentioned advanced business trainings were things like sweet life launch so that people know who are listening and absorbing this,
who are really ready to get to the next level or really want somebody to personally work with them that they can relate to that.
Absolutely. I would love to work with you to help you grow your business But that was a lesson that took me over a year to learn.
Don’t be afraid to make available what you have. Don’t go over word like I did and not sell to people or not articulate how you can transform their life for their business because you want to prove another point or you want to.
You know, be a mission to the world and make sure that people know exactly how you can get them Results both through your podcast if you’re launching a podcast or through the content that you share,
if you aren’t launching a podcast for the content that you put out in social media Ah, lot of people just put out content or social media with no call the action saying,
Hey, do you need more help? I’m here for you. Don’t be afraid to sell your service.
Is those air than 10 lessons I learned from three years of podcasting? Let me just give you a really quick recap.
Lesson number one was to know my listeners and to sort my shows and my content accordingly so that my listeners could find exactly what they were looking for or know that they shouldn’t listen to a show lesson.
Number two was to be picky about my guests and stop getting these dudes on here that want to pitch themselves and on Lee.
So all of their stuff to you guys. And so our application process is pretty extensive on how we pre screen guests to be on this show.
If any of you ever applied before, I just want you to know that that’s why her application process is the way that it is.
I would love to have you on the show, and I’d love to have you apply Number three. Don’t worry about her.
The other people’s feelings some people just don’t necessarily resonate with your message. And being brutally honest in the content that you share on your show is okay.
And that’s who you are. And you need to do you. Lesson number four. The systems Air King that self explanatory.
Get systems down, don’t divert from them and follow them to the tea less Number five is. It’s never gonna be perfect,
and you might need to record from places that you didn’t expect to, and your audio might not be perfect.
Your show might not be perfect but getting it out there is better than never getting another cause you’re waiting for a perfection.
Number six is Some people just won’t like you. And that is totally okay. Number seven is your hardest work may go unnoticed.
Number eight is to trust your team. Number nine was to plan ahead and number 10 was Don’t be afraid to sell.
Okay, So on this show I spoke directly to those of you guys. They’re considering launching a podcast.
But again, these lessons can reply across the board to your business, to content you’re creating on social media and I hope you take them to heart.
I would love for you to not have to go through some of the hard lessons that I learned and not waste some of your time.
Like I have wasted my And in closing, I just want you to know not to be afraid. Tow,
Launch your show, but toe on Lee, launch a podcast. If you are totally ready to be committed to it.
You don’t want to be that podcast that launched and only recorded, like 20 episodes. Unless, of course,
that’s the design of the content you’re delivering in second The second part of closing, of course, is that if you would like to launch your business,
or if you’d like to launch a podcast in conjunction with Growing Your business, then cruise over to sweet Life co dot com and join me in sweet life Watch.
Let’s get your business and your podcast movie. Thank you so much for tuning into this show. I love hearing from you guys and really quick.
Before we leave, I want to give a shout out Thio. This week’s podcast review. This review is from Lisa Marie Pepe,
she said. One of the best podcast for women April is the real deal. Authentic, savvy, funny and inspiring.
And she offers a listener practical and easy things to implement with action steps, all of which are instrumental and being a successful entrepreneur.
Whether you’re just starting up or a been in business for several years, I guarantee the sweet life entrepreneur a podcast.
We’ll provide you with everything you need to succeed in life in business. Do yourself a favor and subscribe.
Now. Lisa Marie, thank you so much for being a listener to the show. I appreciate you so much,
and if you would like to get a shout out on the podcast cruise overto abou podcasts and leave us review.
Or you can also cruise over to my Facebook page. You can find me in April Beach on Facebook and leave this review on Facebook as well,
and for all of the show notes of everything we talked about in today’s show, including the podcast statistics in the data that I dropped in a ruling cool graphic that comes along with that data and cruise over to sweet life.
Podcast dot com forward slash 1 62 All right, I’ll talk to you guys next week.
That’s all folks!

Episode 159: How to Become An Influencer In Your Industry – Part 2 – with Kathy Haan

Kathy Haan SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

 

Subscribe: iTunes | Google Podcasts | SpotifyAndroid Devices | iHeart Radio | TuneIn | Stitcher | Facebook Messenger
Episode Tools:

Join us for Speakers Summit Virtual Mastermind!

Episode Highlights:
  1. The last five strategies to get influencer marketing.
  2. Kathy’s hacks for getting branding photography for FREE!
  3. The secret media weapon the major influencers know about that you can utilize as well.
Why This Episode Is Awesome:

If you haven’t listened to Part 1 of my interview with Kathy Haan, you’ll want to make sure you do that before listening to this episode.

Kathy Haan is a business coach, travel blogger, influencer, podcaster, and travel agency owner. You can find her work featured in places like Forbes, USA Today, Cosmopolitan, and Thrive Global. When she’s not at home in Iowa with her husband, three children, and two enormous Great Pyrenees dogs, you can usually find her traveling the world, creating content, and storytelling on stages.

Take a listen to this final part with Kathy to understand why she says, “The best way to gain authority is to borrow it from someone else,” and how you can become an influencer in your industry!

How to Take Action:
    1. Join us for Speakers Summit Virtual Mastermind!
    2. Connect with Kathy Haan (@kathyhaan) and myself (@sweetlife_entrepreneur) on Instagram
    3. Join me in my business mentorship and mastermind, SweetLife Launch.

Links Mentioned:

Kathy Haan’s Website

Kathy Haan’s Blog

Kathy Haan on Facebook

Kathy Haan on LinkedIn

Kathy Haan’s Media Page

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #158: How to Become An Influencer In Your Industry – Part 1 – with Kathy Haan

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #037: Building A Profitable Creative Business – With Jeff Goins

Jeff Goins’ Book: Real Artists Don’t Starve

Help A Reporter Out (HARO)

One Model Place

FaceApp

Episode 158: How to Become An Influencer In Your Industry – Part 1 – with Kathy Haan

Kathy Haan SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

 

Subscribe: iTunes | Google Podcasts | SpotifyAndroid Devices | iHeart Radio | TuneIn | Stitcher | Facebook Messenger
Episode Tools:

Join us for Speakers Summit Virtual Mastermind!

Episode Highlights:
  1. What influencer marketing is.
  2. Why you need influencer marketing.
  3. The first three strategies to get influencer marketing.
Why This Episode Is Awesome:

This is not an episode about how to have a million followers. If you care more about the numbers than the results you deliver and the relationships you build, you will fail.

However, if you want to learn from a true international influencer whose story and work has changed lives and if you want to develop your influencer marketing plan for the right reasons, this is the episode for you.

Kathy Haan is a business coach, travel blogger, influencer, podcaster, and travel agency owner. You can find her work featured in places like Forbes, USA Today, Cosmopolitan, and Thrive Global. When she’s not at home in Iowa with her husband, three children, and two enormous Great Pyrenees dogs, you can usually find her traveling the world, creating content, and storytelling on stages.

Kathy had so many amazing insights and tips that we’ve decided to split this episode into two parts. So, make you don’t miss part two.

How to Take Action:
    1. Join us for Speakers Summit Virtual Mastermind!
    2. Connect with Kathy Haan (@kathyhaan) and myself (@sweetlife_entrepreneur) on Instagram
    3. Join me in my business mentorship and mastermind, SweetLife Launch.

Links Mentioned:

Kathy Haan’s Website

Kathy Haan on Facebook

Kathy Hann on LinkedIn

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #156: How To Create Your 2020 Strategic Plan: A Guide For Lifestyle Entrepreneurs – with April Beach

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #146: How to Become A Speaker and Use Stages To Grow Your Business – with Pete Vargas

Hal Elrod’s Website

Hal Elrod on Instagram

Hal Elrod’s Podcast | Achieve Your Goals with Hal Elrod

Hal Elrod’s Book | The Miracle Morning: The Not-So-Obvious Secret Guaranteed to Transform Your Life (Before 8AM)

TikTok

Episode 157: How It’s Made: Behind-the-Scenes of the SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast™ As It Turns Three Years Old – with Britany Felix and April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

 

Subscribe: iTunes | Google Podcasts | SpotifyAndroid Devices | iHeart Radio | TuneIn | Stitcher | Facebook Messenger
Episode Highlights:
  1. What it really means for my business to bring you this show each and every week so you can evaluate if a podcast is right for your business.
  2. The good, bad, and the ugly behind every aspect of the podcast and step in the process of making it.
  3. The free gifts I have for you as a thank you for making these past three years so special for me.
Why This Episode Is Awesome:

I love getting to pour into you every week and provide you with the trainings and guidance that helps you build your business and find lifestyle freedom.

This podcast has allowed me to connect with you in a way nothing else has.

That’s why I could think of no better way to celebrate our third birthday than by giving you a behind-the-scenes look at what it takes to bring you a new episode each week.

And, I could think of no one better to help me with this than Britany Felix.

Britany has been a part of this journey as my editor and producer since the very first episode. This podcast literally wouldn’t have launched without her and I’m so happy I get to celebrate this birthday with her and you, my amazing listeners!

How to Take Action:
    1. Share this episode on social media, take a screenshot, and then email it to podcast@sweetlife.co by January 19th, 2020 to get free access to my Ideal Client Avatar Masterclass.
    2. When you do step one, you’ll also be entered to win a 2-hour deep-dive business strategy training session valued at $700!
    3. Join me in my business mentorship and mastermind, SweetLife Launch.

Links Mentioned:

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #00: Lifestyle Entrepreneur Manifesto

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #87: Being Brave, Bold and Authentic to Connect with Your Tribe and Grow Your Online Business – with Amy Porterfield

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #107: Are Online Courses Really Working? What Entrepreneurs Need To Know

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #122: How To Choose An Online Business Model That’s Right For You

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #146: How to Become A Speaker and Use Stages To Grow Your Business – with Pete Vargas

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #151: How To Plan Your 2020 Lifestyle Business Calendar, To Live Your Best Year Yet – with April Beach

April Beach on Instagram

SweetLife Entrepreneurs Community on Facebook

SweetLife Entrepreneurs Behind the Scenes on YouTube

Airtable

GarageBand

Skype

SquadCast

Audacity

Libsyn 

you. You’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probe Age. Wow. Wow. Wow. Okay, welcome to this show. It is episode number 157. Do you know what that means? I honestly didn’t even sink into me and tell the end of November when I was planning our podcast episodes. It is our third podcast birthday. We have been podcasting. You and I have been together.
We’ve been delivering episodes to you every single week for three complete years. Like we don’t turn three until that year’s completed. Wow, I just can’t even believe that we’re here. To be really honest, this podcast has been such a blessing because it’s given me an opportunity to connect with you on a much deeper level than we can do through any social media. Even through writing a book, I’ve written two books. Nothing I’ve done in the past. His enabled us to break down the barriers between technology like podcasting does.
And I am so grateful for you. Literally. I have some big gifts I’m giving you guys big gifts this week for our podcast birthday. It’s gonna be a celebration that want our week long. And I’m so stoked about that before we dive into this, it’s gonna be a little bit of a different episode today. A cool one. I hope you love it. That plan, because it’s a little bit longer than our normal episodes. So just a heads up about that. But it’s gonna give you some awesome insight,
especially if you’re wondering what podcasting is like, what it’s like behind the scenes, how I plan these episodes, how it affects my life and my kids and my money and my travel in my sanity and my sleep and my systems and everything. We’re talking about everything behind the scenes here, but before we get started, I just want it. Bless you. Bless you. Bless you. This podcast would not keep going without you without you subscribing without you sharing this show with your friends without you sending me direct messages on Instagram saying,
Hey, April what you said resonated with me. Those things hit home to me and want to get those comments from you buys when I when I see you sharing it or when I get an email that says, Hey, April, thank you so much for giving this training the way that you did and not charging for it. When I get those messages from you guys, it really keeps me going. That feedback is is so important, because this show really is a love offering and a labor of love for you.
You know, before we started this show, I really felt strongly that any woman that wants to launch a business and grow a business deserved really trustworthy in free, proven, actionable business trainings. And that’s why I created the show in the first place is to make sure that there is good, safe, solid, trusted business coaching for any woman that chooses to watch and grow her business and design her life through entrepreneurship. And if you don’t know me yet, or maybe not that well, maybe your new listener.
Thank you so much for tuning, and I’ve been coaching women tow, watch and grow their business for 23 years, and I’m an online business pioneer. I launch my first online courses back in 2008. Well, we were like duct taping stuff together and my core purpose is to teach women how to design their life through entrepreneurship. So this show really is an extension of my why. And it’s just all about you. So thank you so much for tune into it. And so I want to pour into you guys today immediately here on the show right away and bless you and give you gifts for our birthday.
So let’s start out with that. And then we’re gonna dive into today’s episode, and then we’re going to give more gifts away at the end of today’s episode. So the very first thing is, I want to give you guys. If you are listening right now, during the time that we’re recording this show, so during our birthday week only, which means you’re a subscriber, you’re getting this podcast real time. So it’s January 13th 2020 through January 1920 20. So within this week, if you were in between January 13th and January 1920 20 you get Theresa.
I talk about on today’s show. The first thing is anybody listening? I’m giving you completely free access to my ideal client Avatar. Master class. This is an amazing class and It comes with a huge workbook where you’re gonna be able to hone in and find your ideal clients. And what’s even cooler about this is when you’re done with this class, you’re gonna walk away with the copy written for your website Marketing copy Already planned out. It is a killer class and I’m giving you totally free access to it as our birthday present.
How does that sound? So here are the rules. Every single person listening this week who follows these rules is going to get free access to this master class. The rules are number one share. This podcast episode even shared on linked in you can share it on Instagram. You can share it on Facebook. So I want you to share this podcast episode wherever you want to share. You can share in your instagram stories. And when you share it right, a little message or something about why you like this show.
So people understand why the heck you’re sharing it. And you can also tag us If you’re on instagram at Sweet Life entrepreneur or at April Beach, you could find me that way as well. We’d appreciate you sharing it purposefully not just sharing whatever works for you and then take a screenshot of where you shared it. An email, your screen shot. Two podcast at sweet life co dot com. Okay, so again, sure. The episode Take a screenshot email the screen shot The podcast at sweet life coat dot com has to be This week has to be between January 13th January 19th and we’re gonna send you completely free access to my icy A My ideal client avatar Master class,
which is like the gold standard Master class. If you are in a place where you are having trouble finding your clients or communicating with them or you don’t know what you’re niches, this is all for you. And then on top of that, one person is going to win a two hour deep dive business strategy training with me, and that is a $700 value. Okay, so share the episode, and then one person who does that and gets access yes to the master class is also going to get a two hour,
totally free deep dive business strategy and planning session with me. So I hope that gets you totally excited, and I want you to listen to the whole inter show but positive show right now, and you can share it and send your screen shot and make sure that you get access and that you are intertwined The strategy session. Okay, so this show, like I said, it’s a little bit different. There is no one better that I could think about celebrating our third birthday with us, then Britney Felix.
Britney Felix is our podcast producer, and I found Britney and you’ll hear a little bit about this story. I found Britney because, frankly, I had thought that I could produce his podcast myself. I was like a card. Could this be got into a very quickly and realize that? Yeah. No, that’s just not gonna happen. And so I immediately found Britney, and I will tell you this show would not have launched without Britney. Britney Felix is a podcast editor and consultant who founded podcasting for coaches,
where she specializes in helping female coaches and consultants either launch a podcast for their business or improve their existing podcast so that they can develop relationships with their ideal clients, build brand awareness, generate new leads and making valuable networking connections she’s awesome. And so she is going to interview me on this week’s show, and we’re gonna share a lot of behind the scenes. You guys, we talk about what it really means to produce a podcast week in and week out. For those of you guys that are thinking about hot casting,
I know a lot of people start podcasting and then drop out, which is not great for your brand. And so this show is gonna help you determine Maybe if podcasting can be part of your future can help you connect with your audience more. But then we’re also sharing the good the bad. Am the super duper ugly? You guys were gonna know how I cut corners behind the scenes when I choose guests and why I choose guests and why I choose certain guests over other guests. We’re totally getting into it,
and we’re sharing the complete production. So I’m sure you exactly step by step how we produce this show, what I do in what order what we upload to wear and how the show is completely produced from the audio Thio, the research behind each one of the show’s toe actually marketing the show as well. So sit back. Grab a glass of wine. Celebrate with me. Thank you so much for being here. I appreciate you guys so much. This is sweet life Entrepreneur Podcast Episode number 157 and all the show notes can be found by visiting suite life podcast dot com forward slash 157 All right,
you guys, this is a really special episode. And that is because we have reached our third podcast birthday. The Sweet Life Entrepreneur. A podcast is turning three this week. Maybe it was last week, someplace in the middle of this weekend, next week, and and that we’re just so grateful to you. This is a celebration episode, and I have Britney Felix on the show, and we’re gonna do something a little bit different today. First of all, as I introduced before, Britney is a reason why this podcast launched you guys.
It definitely could not have gotten off the ground or continued to be produced. Especially which is the high quality and attention to detail that Britney and her team bring Thio Not only my podcast, to be honest, but like so many women’s podcasts, she’s just an icon in this space. And I’m so grateful to have her as part of our smart, hard 10 team bringing this show. And so we’re inducing a little bit different. We’re actually like flipping the interview. And Britney is gonna interview me on today’s show regarding how we go through and produce the sweet life entrepreneur podcast and also talk a little bit about behind the scenes of what it takes to bring this podcast to you guys for 157 episodes three years in a row.
So thanks so much for being on the show. Britney and everything. You D’oh! Give everybody an intro. Dios. They don’t know you yet. Yeah, Thank you so much, April. I always love being on the show because you just shower me with compliments. And of course, that feels amazing. But I am thrilled to still be working with you three years later. This is kind of surreal to me. You are actually my very first launch client. So you’re the first person who’s client are who show I helped officially,
like, launch into the world. So I consider the show a little bit of my baby as well and I really look forward to the information that you provide as a listener. Even so, even if I weren’t getting paid for it, I would still wanna listen to the show. Because I love the rial take and the raw information that you provide to people you don’t hold back. You’re no holds barred, and I just I love that there’s not enough of that in the world right now. Thank you so much.
Thank you. All right, so this is gonna be a cool thing. Britney knows how hard it is for me. Toe. Create content and bring this episode to you guys. Sometimes it’s beautiful. Sometimes it’s really, really difficult. Usually that all spins around what’s happening in my life with my kids. Is most of you guys know been faithful listeners for three years, and so we’re gonna flip this a little bit and give Britney and opportunity thio kind of walk me through the steps as I share them with you on how we bring this podcast of life.
So the first area we’re gonna dive into is actually the podcast planning process. And as we get into more of the production, then Britney is really gonna be able to share even more behind the scenes of what it takes to bring this show to you. So, Britney, you know, you see this planning process that I put together, You know what would be the questions that other podcasters or people considering podcasting might ask about the planning process. So one thing I would say is I see the end result of the planning.
Basically, I see it when it comes on our spreadsheet. For those that aren’t aware of April’s process, we use a system called Air Table. It’s an online spreadsheet. Platform is completely free, and it just helps us kind of keep everything organized. So I see the topics that are going to be coming up. But I have no idea what goes into deciding what you’re gonna talk about and when. So what’s that process like for you? How do you determine what topics are gonna be discussed in what episode and how does that intermingle with what’s happening in your overall business in life?
Great. Okay, so I have a four step planning process for this show. The first thing I do is I usually look at what’s happening with my business.
So what programs do I have that air coming open? What sales do we have? You know, that might be happening in the Desert times throughout the year.
What events, whether it’s a retreat or one of the mastermind events that we have happening. And then what’s also happening with my affiliate partners?
Because I do have some other businesses away affiliate with that we support. So the very first thing I dio is I look at my whole entire 12 month calendar now as a reference point for you guys.
If you haven’t laid out your 2020 calendar yet, gold back and listen to episode number 1 51 and actually give you the steps toe,
lay out your whole 12 month calendar. And so I do that. And I’m pretty faithful about doing that because the purpose of what we’re doing here is to make sure that in a perfect world,
it’s not always perfect. But in a perfect world, what I’m talking about on the show aligns with what’s happening in my business.
Maybe, um, I’m opening a new program or it’s a new training course or it’s a new event,
and so I want to make sure I’m talking about on the show what’s happening with what we’re offering and the extra help we’re giving entrepreneurs.
And then the second thing that I do, which I don’t know if this is like what everybody else does.
This is just my life, because everything I do is I actually look at what’s happening in my own life with my kids.
You know, where am I gonna be? What is the season of that life? So, for example,
my oldest son is graduating from high school this May. So the podcast episodes that I’ve artist sketch to talk about or what happens to you and your business when you know you’re not totally empty nest.
But when your kids are starting to move on to what they want to do and you have a more of an opportunity to design a different version of your life,
then you have for the last 18 years. And so that’s kind of how I am lined the episodes with what’s happening in my life.
Also seasons, right? So is it summertime? You know, our people trying to plan a vacation in other happenings that are going on is far as trends in the year,
for example, and this is just hypothetical. I don’t have this plant, but it would be like how to do a big you know,
Mother’s Day sale. If that Mother’s Day is in May, then that would be a show that that I would plan to do and released in April.
So I really kind of take a look at what’s happening in my life and what’s happening with what we’re offering and what’s happening within the sales of the year as well.
And then I look at the needs of you, buys the listeners, and this is really what it comes down to.
I can lay it all out here on the counter, and I think it’s a great idea. But what really is like the final check is what you buys need.
And so we look at things very carefully. You’ve been listening to this show for a while. You know,
we specialize in service based business development, whether it’s online or offline. Still, So what’s happening in the industry?
What’s happening with online business? What’s happening with courses? Many of you might have heard the episode that I did last year and I’ll look up the episode and put it in the reference for you of the show notes.
But it was like our online courses really working, and that was a really important episode to have because so many people have launched online courses.
But at that time when we recorded it, the data was not great about how many people were actually buying and finishing them until that was an important show to host.
So it’s kind of an example of what I look at what’s happening in the industry and in what you guys need,
what problems need to be solved, what bottlenecks you guys were facing, what fears or different issues could be coming up.
And I listened very carefully, toe obviously my clients to the women in my mastermind programs, to the women,
my Facebook community and I pay really close attention to those of you who connect with me and share your problems and your issues.
And I develop shows to solve those issues. And the final question I really ask is, what is the injuries?
Olt of a show And I do that actually, even before I start recording the show. So you know What’s the Andrews?
Well, what’s the final need? What’s the final goal or knowledge? Or a problem that’s solved at the end of recording a specific show?
And then the last step I do as faras the planning process is I determine whether or not that particular episode is gonna be a solo at this old or whether or not it should be a guest that I should bring on the show.
And I think, Britney, you think we’re probably about 50 50 solo and guest episodes. I don’t know what it works out to at the end of the year,
because I know you kind of go through phases, which might be something else to talk about where you have mostly solo episodes for a month or two,
and then maybe you have mostly interviews for a month or two, and I think that’s a deliberate choice as well.
Yeah, yeah, I can definitely speak to that, and we’ll talk more about, like the recording schedule and the actual production process.
But I d’oh, so I host a lot more solo episodes, usually before I’m about to open a registration for one of my master minds or registration to work with me in some capacity.
I do that because it helps my audience connect with me more. And it helps me to really clearly communicate and help my audience and my clients to identify is is something they actually need help with before the opportunity arises as to whether or not they want to invest in themselves to get the solution to that.
And so I feels, hear me doing a lot more solo episodes before my sweet life launch programs or before one of my master minded programs opens.
But I look for a lot of guest episodes during the times where I know that I am almost totally out of office,
and I think that’s what breaks easily, too. So it’s kind of brings us to our recording in production phase.
So I am mainly out of office from June through August. This particular year. You guys, I don’t know how I’m gonna do it yet.
Connect with me on Facebook or Instagram and and send me some encouraging mama entrepreneur vibes because and when I’m looking at my calendar,
I’m pretty much traveling from May all the way through the end of August in although that you know, that’s a laptop life.
That’s what we all want. It’s really difficult to maintain the podcast during those times, and so I have to be a super awesome planner to make sure that I have guests lined up and we’ve already pre recorded.
So this kind of how this works for me, I usually have a week blocked off on my calendar.
That is all podcast production week, whatever that week is. I do a very good job of not scheduling when I want private client meetings not filling out my calendar with anything else in that week,
and it changes. It’s not always like the first or the third week of the month. It does change,
but its planned well in advance in that week is just too match, recording with guests and producing podcast episodes,
researching my own episodes and outlining my own podcast radiance that I host. So I do that one week a month,
but I don’t record in June, July and August, so that means that I have to start batch ng really early,
and this is for any of you have applied to be a guest on my show. Just know that so I’m already recording.
You know, those summer show’s starting in the month of February were batch ing those. So I do have guests more often during the summertime when I’m not really there,
and it just helps me to be able to serve our listeners more because I am that put in time,
usually only working like a 15 hour work week and traveling around with my kids. I love that you do patching,
and that is what I recommend any of my clients. D’oh! Because it really does help you get into this frame of mind where you can just knock all of these things out.
And how great is it to know that you have your content for Well, you know, like three months plan now?
And it’s not something you have to worry about when you travel, because I can personally attest to this.
I actually, whenever I travel, I find it so difficult that I put my podcast on hiatus every time,
every time, meaning whatever I travel for, like a month or two at a time, because I do that.
So I think that it’s great that you planned this out ahead of time and it’s absolutely critical that is planned out ahead of time.
There’s no way that you can start doing this even a month before you want to take off and travel like this or enter an extremely busy season where,
you know, you’re just not gonna be able to put the time and effort into it, right? And I love Okay,
So you guys that don’t know Britney yet you should definitely connect with her. She travels everywhere, and I think that’s why Britney and I work together so well together because she’ll send me a message or email usually is earlier she can and saying,
OK, hey, I’m gonna be in Scotland for a month or whatever, you know. And so we worked together where she’s,
you know, she might come to me and say, OK, April, I know your batch recording just wanted to let you know I’m gonna be out for this period of time,
too. So let’s try to get in all your batch recording ahead of time so that so it works for both of our travel schedules,
and I think that’s one of the reasons why she and I worked so well together. Very grateful for that because our lives are travel,
lives are very, very similar. And, you know, I think that one of the things I do have to say that’s important about pre recording and connecting with the right audience is even though I’m traveling in June,
July and August, I’m still working with clients. I’m still running my master minds and still coaching entrepreneurs.
I’m still hosting my programs, and so all of my energy during that time is actually poured into direct work with the clients it that are in our community.
And so it’s incredibly important to me to make sure that I have guests on the show that can keep pouring in at the level that I want for our listeners who aren’t yet in our community.
And so I really try to seek out those gas that are experts in their space in order to deliver deliver shows that are timely for that time of year.
So when I say I travel in most of you know this, it doesn’t mean I’m not working at all.
It just means I don’t have extra time to be thinking about making sure we’re putting out great content on this podcast because that would be very,
very difficult. I’ve never recorded a podcast away from home. I know many people do where they can,
like recorded podcast in the hotel. It just doesn’t work for my creative mind. Like I need to be in my space,
my creative space not staring at some, you know, hotel wallpaper in order to be inspired to create a show for you guys.
And so I record everything here. I do not record on the go. I think that’s important to mention.
Yeah, it is. Because you definitely can do this on the go. I mean, I know people who travel full time,
as I’m sure you d’oh! And they still record content. So it is possible. But I agree.
I do prefer to record a home. I have bought travel microphones. Ah, few different ones. And I take them with me planning to record,
you know, maybe like a solo episode. And it never happens because it’s just I’m not in the frame of mind like you are.
Yeah, and I think that that’s just knowing who you are. So if you’re thinking about starting a podcast and you’re wondering how you could do it or you can do it from.
I think knowing how you best create content is a really important question to ask yourself before you decide that.
Hey, I can record, you know, from the car. Or, you know, I could record anywhere.
And so I think that’s just important thing. To know yourself well and to kind of get into that healthy ecosystem that inspires you to create really awesome stuff.
And and this just happens to me, my home office space, you know, which obviously comes with its drawbacks because,
for example, like when the kids were on vacation, a lot of shows, they’re like the dogs were barking and somebody is like,
coming at last, have, like, 10 boys stop in through the garage and drop their skateboards everywhere.
And and that’s just the way it is. And that’s actually in nature of this show, and so it doesn’t bother me,
but that might not be a great thing for somebody else, depending on where you guys choose to record,
right. So before we moved to the next phase in the process, I am curious when you do these batch recordings and you do emus faras a few months in advance.
Are you ever concerned? Because I know this is something I hear pretty often about this information not being relevant anymore or about the links not even being good.
A lot of people don’t think about that. You know a program no longer being available. Does that ever occur when you’re kind of planning out this process to think about that?
Yes, 100%. And so the guests that I curate for the show. So if we backtrack a little bit,
the first thing I want to clarify is that after I’ve determined the right episodes that you guys need to solve the problems that you’re currently facing in your business or the trends within the online business space,
I then go to our guest application list, and I then look for guests that can solve those problems for you.
So that’s my process of doing it. I’m very particular about who we curate and how we bring guests to you guys to pour into you.
And if there is not a guest on my application list that I will go find one. We’ve had quite a few guests and show where I’ve hunted down and said,
Hey, listen, my people need what you have to teach and I will go after them and I will personally find them until with that being said,
when I talk about batch ing ahead of time. So with guests, I always make sure that anything they’re sharing it has to have longevity.
If they’re launching a program or something that is timely in the show has to be produced and released on a certain amount of time in order to support them.
That’s something that’s planned well in advance. So that’s something that’ll do with our affiliate partners. And we’ve done that in the past with,
like, Pete Vargas was on the show because we supported his stage to scale method. But we had those plants planned well in advance,
so I usually don’t bring guests on the show for the purpose of selling their programs. It’s usually for the purpose of pouring into our listeners to give them a skill set that they would normally pay thousands of dollars to learn.
And then I love to honor our guests, however, though, that if we can figure out how to then give our our listeners the extra bump with having an opportunity to join their program.
Then that’s planned really well in advance. And then for my own, you know, lengths and making sure everything is in a way that is always timely and always up to date for you guys.
All of our things that we deliver to you are planned out for the whole entire year and very well in advance.
And so I already know exactly what we’re delivering and when we’re delivering it and in what capacity and the links for those things.
And I actually create them at the time that we produce the show. Okay? And I do actually want to go back really quickly to the planning session.
We walked through your four step process there, but what does it look like when you actually sit down to record?
Do you scripted out? Do you have a bullet list? You just kind of let it flow. What does that process look like for you?
I love that question. Okay, so I outlined all of the business trainings, and then I research and make sure that I have all the most up to date data and then I’m delivering the best training that I can.
And so it’s. It’s a lot of old school writing at first, and after three years of podcasting,
you guys were totally gonna laugh at me. I have a five inch, three ring binder that is hand written notes for every single episode.
It is so old school. It’s being born in 1976 and it comes naturally to me. And so I have notes,
and I have pages and pages based on the training that I’m giving now 2020 I finally and Britney, I just sent this to you.
With our most recent episodes, I’m finally and transferring the whole entire outline in outlining every single episode in Dropbox paper.
So we use is for a software We use Dropbox in order to share files and produces podcast amongst our teams.
And so I am riding out in outlining episode of Dropbox Paper, which does a couple of things. First of all,
it’s not gonna go if my house ever burns down. Secondly, there’s a flight or something terrible. Secondly,
yeah, I’m hoping that really helps Britney’s team to produce our show notes, and it helps my team to create the E mails in the articles and the Social media posts to produce the show because it’s directly coming from me instead of having people have to listen to the episode,
go through the transcription and write a summary to the best they can. And so I just really started doing that.
And I’m hoping it’s gonna be able. Thio Give our listeners even more thorough content throughout the week for every single podcast we’re producing,
more in depth content, more steps and actions. So whether they’re listening to the show on audio or rather than reading the block post,
which will be coming up with the block post for every single show as well, however, they like to absorb content,
so that is my process of doing it. But it’s not just the process of recording the show. It’s for a much greater distribution process of the content to get an entire listeners hands that make sense.
Yeah, no, definitely. And I appreciate you breaking down that process because I know for me, I’ve always been curious because I listened to the raw audio.
I listen to it before, gets edited, and you were so well spoken, and if I didn’t know any better.
I would think it was scripted and that you were like the greatest actress in the world because you just run through this content and they’re I mean,
they’re almost no stumbles. Obviously, we all have our verbal ticks and things that we d’oh. But I mean,
you just breeze through this content and I am always so impressed. Well, thank you so much. Yeah,
I just I just want to talk our listeners through it. I think it’s important to talk to them just as if they were standing face to face with me in a live event I was hosting here in Boulder,
Colorado, and I was teaching them the same training. So I do outline it, but nothing scripted.
I don’t read anything. I have heard that before. I know there are some podcasters that even get like teleprompters to read through.
I am not a great reader, you guys, I’ve never been a fast reader. It’s just not who I am.
So if I Meridian something, it does not come out pretty out of my mouth, so that would not be a good option for me or somebody else.
That may be great and that might be where they’re you know, they’re strength is for me. I just need to look at the outline and then I can teach the outline cause I will.
And also, I should say this. I don’t record a podcaster. I don’t teach a podcast in an area where I am not very well qualified or an expert in right.
I’m not just kind of like Polian podcast episodes and Training’s out of thin air and hoping to give somebody results.
I really don’t teacher training and less. I have extensive experience in getting clients results in exactly what I’m teaching.
I don’t have to go back through and read a word for word because I already know it. I just really need the outline to help my mind stay on task so I don’t go on too many tangents throughout the episode,
which I still do anyway, changes their fun, though, so don’t get rid of all the tangent.
Okay, but now that we’re in the process of talking about what it’s like when you sit down and record,
why don’t you want the listener through what that is like recording your solo episodes and recording with your guests yet.
So after I’ve outlined my notes with the sole episodes, I use GarageBand, Britney has All of our sounds are music,
so she mixes it. So I just go through and I just record the hold. Everything in garage man,
there are some times we all have to stop and delete in. Usually, I stop in the lead and start again.
If I look at the timer on garage Band and I’ve been talking for eight minutes and I don’t think I made a point After eight minutes of talking,
I will even look at me like, What did you just say? If in somebody’s valuable eight minutes of their time,
it’s all totally start again. So I will say that that would be the time when I have to come back to the beginning and say,
How can you get this message across faster without his many, you know, mumbo jumbo words? And so I’ll do that’ll take me a few times in Garage Band to go through that.
But once I’m on a roll once, the show is usually with the intro. Once I’m on a roll.
Michelle was started at Flo’s really Easy and Then I export and upload that MP three file to our shared Dropbox folder.
And then I’ll shoot Britney and email and say, Okay, you know, 1 56 is in the box is really all the email says Our system is so smooth now I don’t have to send anything else to her.
And she actually even gets probably a dropbox alert that I’ve uploaded it. So technically, I probably don’t even need to send her that particular email.
And then when I’m recording with guests, I use Skype, which is super archaic. I will say that you guys,
Skype is like, who uses Skype anymore? But we d’oh! And I know there are a lot of other podcasts recording platforms,
so we get switched to. We’ve always used Skype. Our audio quality is really great on Skype, and so we continue to stay with Skye.
But that’s certainly something that, you know, we revisit every single year. Britney and I have a conversation about that and,
um, talk about if that makes sense, still to stay there and then with those files, I actually record video.
So many of you guys might follow us on our YouTube channel where I share behind the scenes video of the podcast.
Super funny. I even share like the pre recording time and all the bloopers and dogs barking and people spilling coffee and everything before we actually hit record.
So if you’re a youtuber, you should check out the YouTube channel for the podcast and you’ll see those on there.
But then we export split tracks and audio files and bring me Why is that? See, this is when we get into your area.
Talk to me about recording this separate audio files on why that’s important. Yeah, so when it comes to recording multiple people,
so even if you have a show where you don’t necessarily have a guest B of a co host. So anytime there’s more than one person and you have to use like 1/3 party recording program like Skype and the recorder that comes with it,
squad cast is another one. Any of those programs you need to have each person on their own track because if you’re both on the same track and one of you coughs,
for example, while the other one is talking, there’s nothing that can be done about that from an editing standpoint,
that cough is gonna stay in there and live in that content and annoy the listener forever. But if they’re on a separate track literally,
it’s a matter of just highlighting it. Clicking one button and that cough is gone, and no one knows that it ever happened.
And it makes it a much, much more enjoyable experience for your listener, which should be just about your main ultimate goal.
From this podcast. You want your listener to love your show. You never want them to be annoyed or think that it’s poor quality.
Yeah, 100%. Thank you for taking care of all that for us. And then we. So we export this guy files same place,
send him to drop box, and then Britney. Britney’s team produces them and and then she sends us a message back after the files have been produced and she and her team manage.
Uploading it. Thio, do you want to share where we put our files and our distribution processes for us?
The tech side to read me? Yeah. So what? This looks like in terms of what I do in this process,
April sends me the files you know, she sends the email like she just mentioned, so that I know I can go and download them from Dropbox.
I do all of my magic, the program that I used to edit. I have some other programs that are way more expensive.
But audacity, which is a free program anyone can edit with it. There’s some basics you can learn.
It’s one of the easiest programs to get started with, and that’s what I use for the actual content at its still as a professional.
I have, like a $900 editing program that holds me clean it up, but I don’t do any of my contact editing in it because audacity is still better to use for that.
So we put it all together with the music and the intros and the Outro owes. And then we have a final MP three file that we upload to April’s hosting service,
which is listen, and that is who I recommend going with. Once we have that in there and reschedule for publication,
it automatically pushes it out to every platform that April is on, which right now is every one of them.
I’m pretty sure I don’t think we’ve missed one. So So we only have to put it in one place and then lips and sends it everywhere.
So it’s not as complicated or difficult as some people think it is before they start a podcast. It’s not like you’re going and submitting this individual episode every single time toe all of these different platforms.
Yeah, and just a little plug there. You guys, we are now on Pandora. I think we’ve been on panderer for a couple of months.
So if you’re a Pandora listener and you have not searched podcasts, I know they’re really doing a big face lift to their home terrace.
Sight, Please describe to us on Pandora. We would love to have more listeners over there because it’s a whole new podcasting platform That would be super cool for us.
It is podcaster only available on Pandora’s mobile platform at the moment. Just kind of us. Enough. I gotcha.
Okay. Cool. Thank you. Yeah. All right. So and then one of the things I wanted to mention about this,
you know, this is when it comes to business delegation in the production, the podcast. There are some things as a business owner.
You should totally delegate that somebody else could do for you and that somebody else should be doing for you.
And there are some things as a business owner that make you happy. One of the things that make me happy that I could totally delegate is selecting pictures and selecting the photography for our podcast episodes.
If you’ve ever been to sweet life podcast dot com, you’ll see there’s a lot of photography on that site because I think the photography tells a story.
I personally choose every single picture for every single podcast episode. And if you’d haven’t noticed every single picture with maybe the exception of a couple and and it’s still in there somewhere,
even if you can’t see it, it has water in it. And that’s just my brand. And it’s our company,
and it’s the soul of our company is really the ocean. And so every single photograph will have some aspect of water in it someplace,
and that just brings me joy away. And so I just wanted to share that you guys don’t. If you’re thinking about launching a podcast,
you you don’t have to delegate everything and the things that make you happy? That’s an important part to mention.
It just makes me happy. And so I do it. I’ve tried to delegate it before, and it made me sad.
So I keep that in house after that. So the podcast goes to different places. What we talked about goes to Britney to produce it,
and then the other half of it, which is the last part of producing this show, is I send it to my marketing in my content quarterback team and what that means is there so much podcast?
There’s so much information. There are so many tips and there’s so many steps with an ever single one of the business training podcast that we now need to distribute it out and get in in the hands of everybody.
And so that goes in their direction. And this is also an important reason why I need to match record because it makes everybody’s life better,
makes Britney’s life better, that she has the audio files ahead of time. It also makes my marketing teams life easier because they already know that they have four weeks to create the content in the social media posts in the little video snippets and all these things that go out for every single episode well in advance.
So when I do my job and makes it easier for everybody else to do their job, I will say that it is very hard to match record sometimes when things were going on with my life and my kids and when I’m doing a lot of traveling.
So this fall I did not do a great job match recording. There were a couple times where I was getting Britney and episode look right on the deadline for her to be able to produce it.
So it’s not always perfect, and I’m not always great at this. But when I am, my stress is much less in.
Everybody’s able to do their job much better, and that brings us to that last part, which is the last part of producing the show is really the impact on you guys.
I’m always asking myself, How can I make this show more impactful, more actionable, more usable, more simple for you to implement in your business?
So how can I help you? Our listeners take the tree means and actually apply them to your business or help you to think or strategize or help you to turn your thoughts into reality based on each one of the episodes.
And so a couple ways we’ve done this in the past, and we’re honestly, we’re always revisiting this to see what you guys are actually responding.
Thio. So we’ve done live streams on Facebook. We’ve done weekly live streams on instagram. We’ve done behind the scenes videos like I mentioned in YouTube.
We have published the full audio file in a video format to our Facebook page, and I also have hosted and still do.
I host a monthly live question and answer business training session for those vests that are in our podcast insiders community.
And so we try to make sure that we’re not just giving you the information, but we’re helping you implement it,
because in the end of the day, this is for you. I heard you know all this. I’m the one teaching it.
I’m not doing this for me to sit there and share a business training. It’s making sure that you,
our listeners or getting the help in the support you need that honestly will have other business coaches charged thousands and thousands of dollars for in a way that you can actually them in your business right away.
And that’s part of being a social entrepreneur. That’s part of our mission of the sweet life podcast is to give you guys trusted,
proven business training center free and that you can take to the bank and applying your business right away. And so I Oh,
the third part of this is just really asking ourselves, How do we help you implement it more? How do we help you actually use the content in the training that we have created?
So before we wrap up, I have a couple of things that I am just curious about even myself,
as someone who has seen you grow and this podcast grow over the past three years. And I’m sure your listeners a curious about this as well,
especially if they’re considering starting their own podcast. What have been some of the biggest struggles or some of the biggest growth moments and opportunities over the past three years with this podcast,
what have you really maybe learned the hard way and and now you know, you’re gonna take those lessons and move it forward to just make this podcast even better in 2020.
Definitely scheduling and having to stay on top of my schedule in batch recording. That has been very difficult for me to d’oh.
So that struggle number one, number two in the beginning. And I’m sure this before in the beginning,
I thought that I could do everything myself, and I learned very quickly that I couldn’t produce the show without you,
I didn’t get the first episode off the ground, so I identified very well that technology and April don’t get along that well,
and I needed to get that off my plate. But then the third thing, I would say we’re just for me.
Personally, I feel like I have grown as a leader in the fact that I have to be very clear about the injuries.
Old I’m giving people from each episode. So in the beginning, and I don’t no, that I was quite is clear.
And I still think that I have a lot of work to do to grow into this, but I’m trying to always share that in the beginning of every episode,
you know, this is what you’re gonna learn This is the end result of hanging out with me for the next 25 minutes if you are in this place than you need this.
So I’m trying to do a better job, actually communicating the expectations of listening to every single show and the better it outlining the show tree means I’m also trying to be a better speaker and not go on as many tensions.
And that’s a little hard, because I I just wanna hang out with my listeners. You know, like I’m just talking just to you right now,
and we’re just talking to one other person listening. It doesn’t matter who else is listening. We’re talking to the one person that is tuned into her computer or her phone listeningto us talk right now,
and I really am striving to make sure it’s like we’re sitting across the kitchen table from each other. But she’s getting a kick ass business training for free,
so I think I need to continue to work hard at being better at that, too. So you mentioned a little bit ago about outsourcing and figuring out what isn’t exactly your strong suit.
I am curious, and I think that this is going to apply to more than just podcasting. This can work for a social media manager,
a marketer via any of these things. We have had moments in the past to be, you know,
completely real and honest, where because I think of a lack of communication, things just weren’t clicking between us,
where we’ve had some tension in some moments of confusion. So what is that like? I mean, we have been working together for technically over three years at this point,
and there have been times where you’ve had to set some boundaries. I’ve had to set some boundaries, but I love that we do it in such a respectful way.
At least I feel so that it doesn’t really impact our working relationship. And even, you know, at this point,
I consider you a friend. So what is that like? How do you navigate that world of outsourcing and working with in other people’s boundaries while also still making sure that you set your own?
Mmm, That is a very hard question. And honestly, answer it. So I am not a great delegator.
I am an entrepreneur. My who I am and my strength that completely into that entrepreneur personality and that is creating and teaching and,
you know, mental rain. When it comes to stopping to think about what I need and then creating a system for it to delegate it,
it’s something that I’m really, really bad out. And so when I bring somebody on board my team,
I have Thio have a very healthy understanding that I’m bringing like you onboard this team because you know more about this than I do.
I don’t have to know everything about everything. And so when you say this is how this has to be and as long as I understand the why behind it,
then I submit to you in that because I’ve given you that place of authority and my company and on my like extended team because,
you know, and I don’t in. So although it pisses me off that I don’t know everything, and sometimes it really hurts and ruffles my feathers when you’re like April,
you have got to get this episode in right now or whatever, you know what I mean? I need that and that’s why I hired you.
And I think that all women, as they’re growing their team. They should have a healthy level of respect for the people that they bring in their team.
You need to take the time. If you identify like me that you’re not a great delegator. Understand that you’re not a great delegator because therefore,
you need to be a better communicator because you understand that you understand that you might not be a great delegator,
and there has to be this incredible level of trust and mutual respect. The other thing that I will say is that you know,
when you’re growing your team, a lot of people start out bringing people on their team, especially women as their best friends.
And you can’t be too nice, but they’re overly nice. Let’s have coffee. Let’s take our kids to the park or whatever,
right? You’re hiring somebody to do a job. And so I think that friendship develops after the establishment,
and that’s what I’ve found. Two. Because I used to do that all the time, and it was very hard to then draw find hard lines in the boundaries between Frank,
my team. So I used to want to be in everybody’s best friend and they could come over for dinner and you know all those things in a night In the last five years,
I haven’t grown my team that way. First, I hire somebody for their area of expertise, and then we develop mutually respectful,
you know, boundaries in a relationship. And then the friendship grows like you went and saw Jacob dancing on the dance with me.
I mean, the way we do stuff together, that’s a business relationship. And I will say this,
you guys, this is why you see men do a better job growing teams and women, cause we all just want to be already is friend.
But it comes down to the bottom line of getting a job done in finding the right person that believes in your mission that believes in what you’re doing.
The resonates with the purpose behind what you’re producing, whatever that may be, and that they have the right area of expertise.
If you do all those things, the friendship’s gonna come out of that. But that’s where I believe that it starts.
Okay, so as is the case when I normally interview someone, this is going on a little bit long.
So let’s wrap this up here and I am curious. What are your three favorite episodes from the podcasts over these last three years?
Okay, I’m so glad you asked me that. So I have to say, in year one, my favorite episode that we did is still the podcast trailer.
It’s episode number 00 if you guys haven’t listened to it before, I cried in that thing like I was so moved and I was so determined to get this podcast off the ground It totally start crying in it.
And I remember reaching out to Britney and being like, I can’t do this. This can’t be the trailer.
And you’re like, No, this is the trailer were producing this and this is in the beginning, we were producing this.
This is what we’re putting out there because this is who you really are. April. It’s just like six minutes long.
It’s my lifestyle entrepreneur manifesto because all of it is still so true. And it’s just everything this partner.
So I love that one. I would say in 2018 it was pretty awesome having Amy Porter field on the show,
and I really love that one. That’s episode number 87. If you guys haven’t heard that one yet.
I love that one because I had known Amy for a few years before we recorded that episode, and I was able to get her on the show and talk not about online courses or marketing until was a really cool show for her to share some vulnerability.
That show is about being brave and bold and being authentic to communicate with your TRIBE. And I loved the opportunity also for Amy,
but then for us to see and hear her talk about things she doesn’t always talk about on her own podcast.
And so I really liked that one. And then for 2019 this shows that I’m a business modeling geek.
It’s definitely number 122. How to choose the best business model for your life because I think that’s way where it needs to start.
For all of you guys, if you don’t choose the right business model the build you’re gonna be totally miserable.
You could even make all the tea in China, and you’d still be miserable if your business model isn’t right.
So it would be episode number 122 from this year. Awesome. Well, I know that you have some incredible listeners,
and you have an audience that absolutely adores you. And I don’t know why they wouldn’t. So is there anybody that you want,
Thio particularly give a shadow too? Yes, In here something. It’s so hard just to pick a couple.
And so I’m just gonna read some reviews for those you guys that have taken a chance. I’m to leave us some reviews on iTunes,
and I would just appreciate you guys being listeners. So much. So the domestic diva said this podcast is informational,
interesting and educational. Thank you so much for posting this violet. And I really, really appreciate that.
We’re going back, like, a couple of years, too. And, uh, see, Nam Lee said this is just what everybody who needs a business who’s starting a business needs step by step all the tools at your fingertips making it clear and easy.
I absolutely love this. Jay said Creative, informative, very enlightening. You totally have to check this out.
And then Caroline Cole said April is terrific. Tune into your strategies you can use immediately to move the needle on your life in your business.
Well done, April. I do appreciate you guys so much. There are so many reviews on here.
It was really hard, really hard to pick. I will say one more from Lila Davidson. She says she loves his podcast for its practical on actionable advice,
and she finds a pro to be more personal than some personable than some other podcast does with the Miller content is probably because I tell why let all my dirty laundry behind the scenes,
I could relate to her mom, entrepreneur and sensibility and reminders on keeping things real as we work hard and build our businesses.
And so, Lila, thank you so much for taking the time to write that review and all the guys,
if you haven’t reviewed us yet on Apple, we would totally love it. And thank you so much,
Britney. We have to give, like, clap my golf club behind the scenes. You guys wouldn’t have this show without Britney.
And so for our third podcast birthday, stay tuned here after we wrap up and we we say goodbye to Britney and I’ll be giving you a bunch of information.
That, and gifts and cool things that you guys can take with you after today’s show. So thank you,
Brittany. I appreciate it. Of course. Thank you. April. Thank you so much for sticking around at the end of this episode.
I know it was longer than most far our episodes. I appreciate you so much more than me sitting here can say in this Mike.
But when I record this show, I don’t imagine myself speaking to hundreds of thousands of people that have downloaded this show.
I just imagine sitting here like me and you with a glass of wine woman to woman talking about business,
talking shop and me pouring into you every time you connect with me on instagram or you share this show with your friends.
I see that on on the other side, too. And I just fully appreciate it so much. Your support for the sweet Life entrepreneur a podcast.
I am some massively awesome episodes plan for you guys in 2020 who? Just wait where I really get your business to the next level.
I’m so excited to pour into you in 2020 and beyond. So as we talked about your birthday present,
the sweet life podcast is giving you a birthday present. I’m giving you completely free access to my ideal client Avatar Master Class.
This is an hour long training and a complete workbook to help you hone in on your ideal clients really decide on your niche and actually write the copy that could go on your website and in all of your marketing,
so that you can make a ton of money. That’s the thing. When you get your messaging right,
that’s when your business is just catapulted to the next level. And so I’m giving you completely free access to my eye.
I see a master class, and one person is also going to receive a free to our deep dive business strategy session with me,
which is $700 value. So in order to get the free master class and have an opportunity to work with me totally free in the deep of strategy session,
here’s a recap. This is the three short steps you need to do Number one share this episode and number two take a screenshot of what you’ve done sharing this episode.
Then number three email s your screen shot to podcast at sweet life co dot com. But the rule is you have to do that this week,
so this is only valid. January 13th through January 1920 20. So that’s rule. So I appreciate you guys.
Thanks for tuning in to the show. All of the show notes can be found by visiting Suite Life co dot com and again email your screen shot of your share to podcast at Sweet life co dot com.
Thanks so much.
No more resu

Episode 156: How To Create Your 2020 Strategic Plan: A Guide For Lifestyle Entrepreneurs – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

 

Subscribe: iTunes | Google Podcasts | SpotifyAndroid Devices | iHeart Radio | TuneIn | Stitcher | Facebook Messenger
Episode Tools:

Join Commitment Week 2o20

Episode Highlights:
  1. What a strategic plan is and why you need one for your business.
  2. The three steps to identifying your strategic plan.
  3. The five core areas you should focus on when creating your strategic plan.
Why This Episode Is Awesome:

You’ve been dreaming big and know that the next decade will define your life, you just may not know exactly how yet.

Now is the time to claim your leadership, influence, and role in your own future – and that starts with your business.

Based on what we’ve seen the past few years and what the trends and research tells us about the next decade, there are five core areas you should be focusing on when planning for 2020 and beyond.

This podcast episode will help you lay out your strategic plan to kick start your best decade ever.

How to Take Action:
    1. Join Commitment Week 2o20
    2. Take the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap Quiz to find out where you’re at in your business so you know what to focus on in 2020!
    3. Join me in my business mentorship and mastermind, SweetLife Launch.

Links Mentioned:

Mel Robbins

April Beach on Instagram

Episode 149: Using Facebook and Instagram Ads On A Budget, To Get Your Online Presence Ready For The New Year- with Sarah Tomes

Sarah Tomes SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

 

Subscribe: iTunes | Google Podcasts | SpotifyAndroid Devices | iHeart Radio | TuneIn | Stitcher | Facebook Messenger
Episode Tools:

Ask Sarah your questions in my FREE Facebook community

Episode Highlights:
  1. Why you shouldn’t boost your posts.
  2. Why you absolutely need to install a Facebook pixel.
  3. The types of posts you should use for your ads and how to determine which ones work best for your audience.
Why This Episode Is Awesome:

There’s a gap between entrepreneurs who don’t have a ton of money to invest in ads and others who’re ready to invest thousands of dollars into ads each month.

Luckily, our guest this week is fully aware of this gap and can help people on both sides.

Sarah Tomes is a certified digital marketer, the founder of Tomes Social Media, and our in-house Facebook and Instagram marketing expert who’s back on the show to help you get started with Facebook ads before we head into 2020.

So, if you’re wanting to get started with Facebook or Instagram ads but you don’t have thousands to invest in hiring a digital marketer and running ads, this is the episode for you.

How to Take Action:
    1. Connect with Sarah and me in my FREE Facebook community
    2. Implement Sarah’s advice over the next 6 weeks to see which type of ads will work best for you in 2020.
    3. Join me in my business mentorship and mastermind, SweetLife Launch.

Links Mentioned:

Sarah Tomes’ Facebook Ads Course | Scroll Stopping Ads Power Hour

Sarah Tomes’ Facebook Mastermind Support Group

Facebook Ads Manager

Facebook Pixel Helper for Chrome

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #125: What You Absolutely Must Know About Facebook And Instagram Marketing Right Now – Part 1 – Sarah Tomes

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #126: What You Absolutely Must Know About Facebook And Instagram Marketing Right Now – Part 2 – Sarah Tomes

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #148: How to Nail Your Online Business Pre-Launch And Build Relationships With Your Audience Faster

April Beach on Instagram

Episode 148: How to Nail Your Online Business Pre-Launch And Build Relationships With Your Audience Faster – With April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur April Beach

 

Subscribe: iTunes | Google Podcasts | SpotifyAndroid Devices | iHeart Radio | TuneIn | Stitcher | Facebook Messenger
Episode Tools:

Find out where you are on my Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap.

Episode Highlights:
  1. The secret launch date you need to set that you might not even know about.
  2. Who this launch is for and what purpose it serves.
  3. How you can apply it to your business right now.
Why This Episode Is Awesome:

Everyone knows about having a big launch date for your brand new business, but do you know about the super-secret launch date that comes before that?

That’s right. There are two launch dates you need to know about and that’s exactly what I’m breaking down for you today.

If you’re working on launching your business and it seems chaotic and confusing, this episode will help you clear out the mess.

How to Take Action:
    1. Set your relationship launch date.
    2. Determine the social media platforms you’ll utilize and create three weeks worth of content to use starting on your relationship launch date.
    3. Join me in my business mentorship and mastermind, SweetLife Launch.

Links Mentioned:

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #143: How to Brand Your Business Part 1: What Is Branding And Who Needs A Brand? – with Elizabeth McFadden

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #144: How to Brand Your Business Part 2: How To Create Your Own Brand Strategy – with Elizabeth McFadden

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #145: How to Brand Your Business Part 3: How To Implement Your Brand In Marketing and Messaging – with Elizabeth McFadden

April Beach on Instagram